2009 TL - Service Express

2009 TL - Service Express
2009 TL
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
© 2008 Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
P/N 00X31-TK4-6001
08/07/29 17:23:12 31TK4600 0001 Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Acura TL. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33TK4C00.
08/07/29 17:23:17 31TK4600 0002 Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Acura TL was a wise investment. It
will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
08/07/29 17:23:21 31TK4600 0003 Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
08/07/29 17:23:32 31TK4600 0004 A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iii
08/07/29 17:23:34 31TK4600 0005 08/07/29 17:23:44 31TK4600 0006 Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 61
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items)............... 213
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 485
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 501
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 533
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) .......................................... 581
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 611
Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ........................ 629
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 633
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page
1
INDEX
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
08/07/29 17:24:00 31TK4600 0007 Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
2
Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park.
Maintenance
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Warranty and Client Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
08/07/29 17:24:09 31TK4600 0008 Your Vehicle at a Glance
HOMELINK BUTTONS
(P. 389)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P. 199)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG
(P. 9, 26)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 9, 26)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 162)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS (P. 164)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 139)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P. 146)
AUDIO (P. 223)
CLOCK (P. 377)
COMPASS* (P. 382)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES (P. 195)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 214)
TRUNK RELEASE
BUTTON (P. 148)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P. 204)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON (P. 487)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 489)
USB ADAPTER CABLE
(P. 256, 266, 347, 358)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 63)
GAUGES (P. 75)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 77)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK (P. 375)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P. 204)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (P. 507)
* : If equipped
3
08/07/29 17:24:19 31TK4600 0009 Your Vehicle at a Glance
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS (P. 131)
NAVIGATION DISPLAY*3
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 34)
FOG LIGHTS (P. 133, 137)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P. 139)
PADDLE SHIFTERS
CENTER DISPLAY (P. 215, 278)
(P. 512)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON (P. 139/163)
ENGINE START/
INSTRUMENT PANEL
STOP BUTTON*2
BRIGHTNESS
(P. 178)
(P. 137)
KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTE SLOT*2
REMOTE AUDIO
(P. 189)
CONTROL BUTTONS
(P. 374)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS for
VEHICLE STABILITY
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*3/
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
BLUETOOTH
OFF SWITCH
HANDSFREELINK
(P. 524)
SYSTEM (P. 424)
(P.
277)
INTERFACE
DIAL
HEADLIGHT WASHERS*2
SELECTOR KNOB (P. 224)
(P. 132)
HORN*1
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 386)
BLUETOOTH
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 193)
STEERING WHEEL
HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM BUTTONS ADJUSTMENTS (P. 140)
IGNITION SWITCH (P. 145)
: Models with keyless access system
(P. 394)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS (P. 78)
* 1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
* 2 : If equipped
* 3 : Refer to the navigation system owner’s manual.
4
08/07/29 17:24:23 31TK4600 0010 Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 16
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 20
Seat Belt System Components ... 20
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 22
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 24
Airbag System Components ....... 24
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 26
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 32
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 33
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 34
Airbag Service .............................. 35
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 37
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 37
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 38
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 38
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 40
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 40
Additional Safety Precautions .... 41
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 42
Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Protecting Small Children .......... 43
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
With LATCH ................................ 47
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
With a Tether ............................... 51
Protecting Larger Children ............ 53
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 53
Using a Booster Seat ................... 54
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 55
Additional Safety Precautions .... 56
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
Safety Labels .................................... 58
5
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
08/07/29 17:24:33 31TK4600 0011 Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 16 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 37 − 56 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 568 ).
08/07/29 17:24:40 31TK4600 0012 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(1)
(8) (9)
(4)
(3)
(10)
(7)
(11)
(5)
(2)
(7)
(6)
(2)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(8)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
CONTINUED
7
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(9)
08/07/29 17:24:49 31TK4600 0013 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side and rear impacts, and
rollovers.
08/07/29 17:24:58 31TK4600 0014 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
26 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 30 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
CONTINUED
9
08/07/29 17:25:05 31TK4600 0015 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
32 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
10
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember however, that no safety
system can prevent all injures or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
08/07/29 17:25:15 31TK4600 0016 Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 37 − 56 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and trunk
are closed and locked.
Your vehicle has a door/
trunk open indicator (red)
on the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the trunk lid is not
tightly closed.
See page 146 for how to lock the
doors, and page 12 for how the door/
trunk open indicator works.
You will also hear a beep when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and each time you open
any door or the trunk with the key in
the ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
Your vehicle also has a door and
trunk open indicator on the multiinformation display to indicate when
a specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed. You will see the
appropriate indicator(s) for each
condition.
CONTINUED
11
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front seat.
08/07/29 17:25:21 31TK4600 0017 Protecting Adults and Teens
The above illustration shows that all
doors and the trunk are open.
When the trunk is not tightly closed,
the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator will
come on.
When one or more doors or the
trunk lid are not tightly closed, the
corresponding indicator for each
condition will come on.
The above example shows the front
right and rear left doors, and the
trunk open.
12
08/07/29 17:25:30 31TK4600 0018 Protecting Adults and Teens
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 120 .
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 140 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
CONTINUED
13
Driver and Passenger Safety
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
08/07/29 17:25:36 31TK4600 0019 Protecting Adults and Teens
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
See page 155 for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
14
08/07/29 17:25:43 31TK4600 0020 Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
See page 155 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
CONTINUED
15
Driver and Passenger Safety
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
08/07/29 17:25:50 31TK4600 0021 Protecting Adults and Teens
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 156 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
16
08/07/29 17:25:57 31TK4600 0022 Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE BUTTON
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
button and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 20 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
17
Driver and Passenger Safety
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
08/07/29 17:26:04 31TK4600 0023 Protecting Adults and Teens
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
18
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
08/07/29 17:26:12 31TK4600 0024 Protecting Adults and Teens
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbags inflate.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your airbags inflate.
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
19
Driver and Passenger Safety
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
08/07/29 17:26:21 31TK4600 0025 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages 28 and 29 ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 78 ).
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
20
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 17:26:31 31TK4600 0026 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 16 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 49 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
CONTINUED
21
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
08/07/29 17:26:37 31TK4600 0027 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
22
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
08/07/29 17:26:43 31TK4600 0028 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
564 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Acura provides a limited warranty on
seat belts. See your Acura Warranty
Information booklet for details.
23
08/07/29 17:26:49 31TK4600 0029 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8)
(9) (2)
(7) (12)
(5)
(11)
(15)
(14)
(1)
(8)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(3)
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(10)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
ODS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
(16) Safing Sensor
24
(10)
(13)
(14)
(7)
(4)
(5)
(13)
(16)
08/07/29 17:27:00 31TK4600 0030 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 30 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
32 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 31 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 20 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
28 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 29 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine
start/stop button instead of an
ignition switch. ON Mode is the
equivalent of ON (II). See page
180 for ignition switch and power
mode comparison.
CONTINUED
25
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 22 ).
08/07/29 17:27:09 31TK4600 0031 Additional Information About Your Airbags
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 33 ).
How Your Front Airbags Work
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 32 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 34 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
26
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 34 ).
08/07/29 17:27:16 31TK4600 0032 Additional Information About Your Airbags
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Stage Airbags
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
CONTINUED
27
Driver and Passenger Safety
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
08/07/29 17:27:26 31TK4600 0033 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
28
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
08/09/04 19:54:43 31TK4600 0034 Additional Information About Your Airbags
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
PASSENGER’S SEAT
WEIGHT SENSORS
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Acura does
not encourage carrying an infant or
small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of an infant or
small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
kg), the system will automatically
turn the passenger’s front airbag off.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
CONTINUED
29
Driver and Passenger Safety
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 34 ).
08/07/29 17:27:39 31TK4600 0035 Additional Information About Your Airbags
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
Also, make sure the floor mat
behind the front passenger’s seat
is hooked to the floor mat anchor
(see page 565 ). If it is not, the mat
may interfere with the proper
operation of the sensors and
operation of the seat.
How Your Side Airbags Work
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against cargo on the
seat or floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
30
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
08/07/29 17:27:46 31TK4600 0036 Additional Information About Your Airbags
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 33 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
31
Driver and Passenger Safety
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
08/07/29 17:27:55 31TK4600 0037 Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
One or both side curtain airbags may
inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
32
How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 17:28:05 31TK4600 0038 Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position or
on models with keyless access
system, press the engine start/
stop button to set ON mode (see
page 180 ).
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
U. S.
Canada
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
out (see page 67 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display.
CONTINUED
33
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
08/07/29 17:28:13 31TK4600 0039 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
U. S. Canada
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
34
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
08/07/29 17:28:21 31TK4600 0040 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
35
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
08/07/29 17:28:27 31TK4600 0041 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
36
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
08/07/29 17:28:35 31TK4600 0042 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 42 − 52 ).
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 53 − 56 ).
37
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.
08/07/29 17:28:45 31TK4600 0043 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
38
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 34 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 53 for important
information about protecting larger
children).
08/07/29 17:28:57 31TK4600 0044 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
U.S. Models
DASHBOARD
SUN VISOR
Driver and Passenger Safety
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
39
08/07/29 17:29:05 31TK4600 0045 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 53 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 155 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
16 ).
40
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
08/07/29 17:29:14 31TK4600 0046 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 50 and 51 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use. Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (see page 150 ).
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 147 ).
41
Driver and Passenger Safety
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose
08/07/29 17:29:23 31TK4600 0047 Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
42
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
08/07/29 17:29:32 31TK4600 0048 Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
CONTINUED
43
Driver and Passenger Safety
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
08/07/29 17:29:37 31TK4600 0049 Protecting Infants and Small Children
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 34 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
44
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
08/07/29 17:29:44 31TK4600 0050 Selecting a Child Seat
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
rear seats.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
45
Driver and Passenger Safety
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
08/07/29 17:29:51 31TK4600 0051 Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
46
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
08/07/29 17:30:00 31TK4600 0052 Installing a Child Seat
MARKS
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
LOWER ANCHORS
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
COVER
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
STRAP
Outer seating position
2. Use the pull strap to lower the
anchor cover on the lower seat
cushion that covers the LATCH
anchor holes in the seat.
3. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
47
08/07/29 18:06:22 31TK4600 0053 Installing a Child Seat
HEAD RESTRAINT
BUTTON
Outer seating position
4. Push the buttons located next to
each rear head restraint to pivot
the head restraints down.
Rigid type
5. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
48
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
6. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
08/07/29 17:30:17 31TK4600 0054 Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP HOOK
COVER
7. Route the tether strap over the
head restraint, then attach the
tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
8. Tighten the tether strap as
instructed by the child seat maker.
9. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
CONTINUED
49
Driver and Passenger Safety
ANCHOR
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
08/07/29 17:30:25 31TK4600 0055 Installing a Child Seat
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
50
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
08/07/29 17:30:32 31TK4600 0056 Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Anchor
TETHER STRAP HOOK
COVER
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
Driver and Passenger Safety
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
COVER
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
1. After properly securing the child
seat with the lap/shoulder belt
(see page 21 ), pivot the head
restraint down (see page 156 ) and
route the tether strap over the
head restraint.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
CONTINUED
51
08/07/29 17:30:39 31TK4600 0057 Installing a Child Seat
2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Using the Center Anchor
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
COVER
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 49 ), push the
head restraint down, then route
the tether strap over the top of the
seat-back.
2. Follow steps 2 and 3 in the
previous column.
52
08/07/29 17:30:46 31TK4600 0058 Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
53
08/07/29 17:30:55 31TK4600 0059 Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
54
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
45 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
08/07/29 17:31:03 31TK4600 0060 Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 16 and 53 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout the ride.
CONTINUED
55
Driver and Passenger Safety
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
08/07/29 17:31:11 31TK4600 0061 Protecting Larger Children
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
56
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
08/07/29 17:31:18 31TK4600 0062 Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the trunk lid open, airflow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows,
and set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
57
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
08/09/04 19:55:08 31TK4600 0063 Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD
U.S. models
Canadian models
58
RADIATOR CAP
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
08/07/29 17:31:49 31TK4600 0064 Safety Labels
SUN VISOR
U.S. models
Driver and Passenger Safety
DOORJAMB
U.S. models
Canadian models
Canadian models
59
08/07/29 17:31:51 31TK4600 0065 60
08/07/29 17:31:55 31TK4600 0066 Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Trunk............................................... 148
Emergency Trunk Opener ....... 150
Remote Transmitter ...................... 151
Seats ................................................ 155
Trunk Pass-through Cover ....... 160
Mirrors ............................................ 161
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 164
Keyless Access System................. 167
Keyless Access Remote ............ 173
Engine Start/Stop Button ......... 177
Seat Heaters ................................... 193
Power Windows ............................. 195
Moonroof ........................................ 199
Parking Brake ................................ 201
Interior Convenience Items .......... 202
Beverage Holders ...................... 203
Accessory Power Sockets......... 204
Glove Box ................................... 205
Console Compartment .............. 205
Vanity Mirror ............................. 206
Sun Visor .................................... 206
Center Pocket ............................ 207
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 207
Coat Hook ................................... 208
Interior Lights ................................ 209
61
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 62
Instrument Panel ............................. 63
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 64
Gauges .............................................. 75
Fuel Gauge ................................... 75
Temperature Gauge .................... 76
Multi-Information Display .............. 77
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel .......................................... 130
Windshield Wipers and
Washers ...................................... 131
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 133
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature .................................... 135
Daytime Running Lights .......... 136
Fog Lights ...................................... 137
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 137
Hazard Warning Button ................ 139
Rear Window Defogger ................ 139
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 140
Keys and Locks.............................. 141
Immobilizer System....................... 143
Ignition Switch ............................... 145
Door Locks ..................................... 146
Childproof Door Locks ............. 147
08/07/29 17:32:03 31TK4600 0067 Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 63)
GAUGES (P. 75)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 77)
HOMELINK BUTTONS
(P. 389)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 162)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P. 199)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 139)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS (P. 164)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P. 146)
AUDIO (P. 223)
CLOCK (P. 377)
COMPASS* (P. 382)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES (P. 195)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 214)
TRUNK RELEASE
BUTTON (P. 148)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P. 204)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
BUTTON (P. 487)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 489)
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
(P. 193)
USB ADAPTER CABLE
(P. 256, 266, 347, 358)
* : If equipped
62
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (P. 507)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET (P. 204)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P. 375)
08/07/29 17:32:13 31TK4600 0068 Instrument Panel
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 77)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 65, 595)
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P. 72)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P. 64, 595)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 73)
DOOR/TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 71)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR (P. 66)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 67)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P. 71)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR (P. 70)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 65)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P. 64)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 65, 597)
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR (P. 68)
SH-AWD INDICATOR* (P. 73)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P. 73)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 68)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 67)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P. 72)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
(P. 71)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P. 72)
*: If equipped
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 72)
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR* (P. 74)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR
(P. 69)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
63
Instruments and Controls
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P. 64, 596)
08/07/29 17:32:22 31TK4600 0069 Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
64
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals, and you
will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 20 .
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 596 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running, and you
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE
OIL LEVEL’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 595 .
08/07/29 17:32:31 31TK4600 0070 Instrument Panel Indicators
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key, or on models with
keyless access system, if an
appropriate keyless access remote is
used. If it is not a properly coded key
or keyless access remote, the
indicator will blink, and the engine’s
fuel system will be disabled (see
page 143 ).
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. Driving with
the parking brake not fully
released can damage the rear
brakes, axles, and tires.
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 201 ).
CONTINUED
65
Instruments and Controls
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged, and you will also see
a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page 595 .
08/07/29 17:32:36 31TK4600 0071 Instrument Panel Indicators
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
system. You will also see a ‘‘LOW
BRAKE FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK
BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 597 .
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
66
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the ABS. If this happens, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With this indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 521 .
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II); and START Mode is the
equivalent of START (III). See page
180 for ignition switch and power
mode comparison.
08/07/29 17:32:44 31TK4600 0072 Instrument Panel Indicators
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
U.S.
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. You will also
see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG
OFF’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 33 .
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
67
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver’s seat position sensor, or the
front passenger’s weight sensors.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display. For more
information, see page 32 .
08/07/29 17:32:53 31TK4600 0073 Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II); and START Mode is the
equivalent of START (III). See page
180 for ignition switch and power
mode comparison.
68
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA or Hill Start
Assist (on SH-AWD models only)
system. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
VSA SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display. Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal driving ability, but will not
have VSA traction and stability
enhancement. For more information,
see page 523 .
VSA Activation Indicator
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 523 ).
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA or Hill Start
Assist (on SH-AWD models only)
system. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display.
08/07/29 17:33:03 31TK4600 0074 Instrument Panel Indicators
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II); and START Mode is the
equivalent of START (III). See page
180 for ignition switch and power
mode comparison.
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
This indicator has two functions:
1. If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 528 ).
Check the tire pressure monitor on
the multi-information display and
determine the cause (see page 527 ).
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure on the multiinformation display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
have the flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service. For more
information, see page 606 .
CONTINUED
69
Instruments and Controls
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. For more information, see
page 523 .
08/07/29 17:33:10 31TK4600 0075 Instrument Panel Indicators
2. If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page
526 .
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 559 and 563 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
70
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 17:33:21 31TK4600 0076 Instrument Panel Indicators
Door/Trunk Open
Indicator
This indicator comes on red if any
door or the trunk lid is not closed
tightly.
You will also see a corresponding
indicator(s) on the multi-information
display to indicate which door and/
or the trunk is not closed tightly (see
page 11 ).
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 134 .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 136 ).
Fog Light Indicator
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering in order to prevent damage
to the steering box caused by
overheating.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 137 .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER
STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
71
Instruments and Controls
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will stay on,
but should go off after driving a
short distance. If it does not go off,
or comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.
08/07/29 17:33:30 31TK4600 0077 Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. This indicator
will also come on when the light
switch is in AUTO and the lights
turn on automatically. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0);
and ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). See
page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
72
Cruise Main Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page 386 ).
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
386 for information on operating the
cruise control.
System Message
Indicator
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 78 ) to see the message (see
page 88 ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
08/07/29 17:33:40 31TK4600 0078 Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Fuel Indicator
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
Super Handling-All
Wheel Drive (SH-AWD)
Indicator
On SH-AWD models
Security System Indicator
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon. You will also see a
‘‘LOW FUEL’’ message on the multiinformation display.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 2.5 U.S. gal (9.6 ) on
SH-AWD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal
(10.5 ) on 2WD models of fuel
remaining in the tank.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page 381 .
CONTINUED
73
Instruments and Controls
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the SH-AWD system. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page518). Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
For more information, see page 517 .
08/07/29 17:33:49 31TK4600 0079 Instrument Panel Indicators
If the indicator blinks while driving,
it indicates the differential
temperature is too high.
You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
518).
Pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.
Keyless Access System
Indicator
On models with keyless access system
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you select the
ON mode by operating the engine
start/stop button (see page 187 ). If
it comes on at any other time, it
indicates that there is a problem with
the system.
This indicator has two functions:
Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
74
1. If this indicator comes on along
with a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display,
there is a problem with the keyless
access system. Have the vheicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible. For more information,
see page 188 .
2. If this indicator comes on along
with a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
STARTING SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display,
there is a problem with the keyless
starting system. In this case, your
vehicle may not restart. If you can
continue to drive safely, take the
vehicle to your dealer and have it
checked as soon as possible. For
more information, see page 188 .
08/07/29 17:33:55 31TK4600 0080 Gauges
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
U.S. model is shown.
75
Instruments and Controls
TACHOMETER
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
The needle returns to the
bottom after you turn off the
ignition/power mode.
08/07/29 17:34:00 31TK4600 0081 Gauges
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom mark to about the
middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper zone. If it reaches the red
(hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. Turn to page 593 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine cooling system.
76
If the pointer of the temperature
gauge reaches to or above the red
mark, you will also see the ‘‘WATER
TEMP HOT’’ message on the multiinformation display. This will alert
you that the engine should be cooled
down.
08/07/29 17:34:08 31TK4600 0082 Multi-Information Display
You can select the displayed
language and also customize some
vehicle control settings to your liking
with the multi-information display
and the three buttons on the steering
wheel (see page 78 ).
you use, and the driver’s seat and the
outside mirrors move to the position
stored in that remote transmitter/
keyless access remote (see page
164 ).
Normal Display Messages
The driver’s ID (1 or 2) is displayed
when the power mode is set to ON.
On models with keyless access system
Remote transmitter/keyless
access remote 1 is used.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
There are three types of messages:
normal display messages, engine oil
life and maintenance messages, and
system messages.
Remote transmitter/keyless
access remote 2 is used.
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door, the display shows
‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’
depending on which remote
transmitter/keyless access remote
CONTINUED
77
Instruments and Controls
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
08/07/29 17:34:15 31TK4600 0083 Multi-Information Display
On models with keyless access system
These messages go off in about
several seconds.
SEL/RESET BUTTON
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
INFO BUTTONS (▲/▼)
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
These messages go off in about
several seconds after the key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
78
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown on page
80 each time you press the INFO
(▲/▼) button or the SEL/RESET
button.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection is displayed.
08/07/29 17:34:23 31TK4600 0084 Multi-Information Display
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page 87 ) and you can
customize your vehicle control
settings (see page 91 ).
UPPER
SEGMENT
In the normal display mode, the
upper segment displays trip
computer information, such as fuel
economy or average speed. The
lower segment displays the
odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside
temperature, and engine oil life and
maintenance item code(s).
On models with keyless access system
You will see some keyless access
system messages until you select the
ON mode by operating the engine
start/stop button. These messages
can be customized (see page 105 ).
U.S. model is shown.
LOWER
SEGMENT
The multi-information display
consists of an upper segment and a
lower segment.
CONTINUED
79
Instruments and Controls
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 17:34:29 31TK4600 0085 Multi-Information Display
Odometer (See page 81.)
Outside Temperature (See page 84.)
Trip Meter (See page 81.)
Trip Computer (See page 82.)
Engine Oil Life
(See page 84.)
SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor*2
(See page 86.)
Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 85.)
Keyless Memory SettingsTM (See page 91.)
HFL*1 (See page 86.)
U.S. model is shown.
80
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
*1 : On models without navigation system only
This display will be shown when the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.
*2 : SH-AWD models only
08/07/29 17:34:38 31TK4600 0086 Multi-Information Display
Odometer
Trip Meter
Canada
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER B
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
CONTINUED
81
Instruments and Controls
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page 101 ).
ODOMETER
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A, average vehicle speed A,
and elapsed time A are reset at the
same time. When you reset Trip B,
average fuel economy B, average
vehicle speed B, and elapsed time B
are reset.
08/07/29 17:34:48 31TK4600 0087 Multi-Information Display
Go to SH-AWD monitor (if equipped) or tire
pressure monitor. See page 80 for how to
switch the main menu display.
Trip Computer
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:
Average Fuel Economy
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
Instant Fuel Economy
Range
AVG. FUEL A/B
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.
You can customize the Trip A and
AVG. FUEL A reset condition on the
multi-information display (see page
101 ).
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
U.S. model is shown.
82
08/07/29 17:34:56 31TK4600 0088 Multi-Information Display
ELAPSED TIME A/B
This shows the time passed traveled
since you last reset it. When you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, ELAPSED TIME A or B is
reset.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST. L/
100 km (Canadian models)
This shows your current fuel
economy.
When you turn off the engine, INST.
MPG or INST. L/100 km is also
reset.
RANGE
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
83
Instruments and Controls
AVG. SPEED A/B
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
08/07/29 17:35:04 31TK4600 0089 Multi-Information Display
Outside Temperature
U.S.
CANADA
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
Engine Oil Life
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
This shows the remaining engine oil
life. It shows 100% after the engine
oil is replaced and the display is reset.
The engine oil life is calculated
based on engine operating conditions.
For more information, see page 535 .
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 100 ).
84
ENGINE OIL LIFE
U.S. model is shown.
08/07/29 17:35:09 31TK4600 0090 Multi-Information Display
Tire Pressure Monitor
U.S.
Canada
Instruments and Controls
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 527 .
85
08/07/29 17:35:18 31TK4600 0091 Multi-Information Display
SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
SH-AWD models only
To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
392 for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the acura.com/handsfreelink
website.
On models with navigation system
U.S. model is shown.
U.S. model is shown.
This monitor shows how much
torque is being delivered to each
wheel. For more information, see
page 517 .
86
On models without navigation system
You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL) system
without touching your cell phone.
You can see HFL information on the
navigation screen (see page 422 ).
08/07/29 17:35:26 31TK4600 0092 Multi-Information Display
System Messages
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example, the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
Most of the messages are displayed
for about 5 seconds, and then the
normal display returns. If there are
several system messages to be
shown, the display switches these
messages every 5 seconds.
To switch the message(s) before 5
seconds have elapsed, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering
wheel.
Even if you press the INFO (▲/▼)
button, some messages stay on or
come on again at regular intervals
until the problem is corrected.
If the system message indicator
remains lit on the instrument panel,
you can see the corresponding
message(s) again by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
Here is a list of all messages:
CONTINUED
87
Instruments and Controls
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
08/07/29 17:35:38 31TK4600 0093 Multi-Information Display
See page
11
U.S.
Canada
See page
201
See page
20
See page
20
See page
596
U.S.
Canada
See page
595
See page
555
See page
33
Canada
See page
521
U.S.
U.S.
See page
33
See page
595
Canada
See page
523
See page
597
See page
76
88
08/07/29 17:35:53 31TK4600 0094 Multi-Information Display
U.S.
Canada
See page
518
See page
136
See page
527
SH-AWD model only
See page
518
SH-AWD model only
See page
528
See page
507
See page
536
See page
528
See page
73
See page
537
See page
529
See page
488
See page
538
See page
529
See page
70
See page
552
U.S. model shown
U.S. model shown
Canadian models only
CONTINUED
89
Instruments and Controls
See pages
504, 506
08/07/29 17:36:03 31TK4600 0095 Multi-Information Display
See page
136
On models with keyless access
system
See page
191
See page
188
See page
145
See page
181
See page
188
On models without
keyless access system
See page
183
See page
185
See page
182
See page
186
See page
181
See page
190
See page
183
90
08/07/29 17:36:13 31TK4600 0096 Multi-Information Display
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0);
and ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). See
page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
If you try to enter the customizing
mode while the vehicle is moving,
you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP AND
SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE
SETTINGS’’ message and you
cannot change the settings.
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure the driver’s door is
unlocked with a corresponding
remote transmitter/keyless access
remote.
On models without keyless access
system
Make sure your remote transmitter
is linked to the system. You can
confirm the driver’s ID on the
welcome screen when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
See page 154 to link your remote
transmitter to your vehicle.
If the remote transmitter is not
linked, ‘‘CUSTOMIZING NOT
AVAILABLE UNTIL LINKED TO
REMOTE’’ will be displayed, and you
cannot customize the settings.
If you use the key to unlock the
driver’s door, the system cannot
recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or
‘‘DRIVER 2.’’
CONTINUED
91
Instruments and Controls
Keyless Memory SettingsTM
You can customize some vehicle
control settings. To change the
settings, the ignition switch must be
in the ON (II) position, and the
vehicle must be stopped with the
transmission in Park.
08/07/29 17:36:17 31TK4600 0097 Multi-Information Display
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select Keyless
Memory SettingsTM by pressing
either INFO button (▲/▼), then
press the SEL/RESET button. Select
CHG SETTING, then press the
SEL/RESET button.
DRIVER’S ID
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want to
customize.
92
08/07/29 17:36:23 31TK4600 0098 Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
METER SETUP
(P.98)
Description
Changes the language used in the display.
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A
INFO RESET
Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy
to reset when you refuel.
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME
Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three
levels.
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION
Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.
KEYLESS START GUIDANCE
SCREENS*2
MEMORY POSITION LINK
Changes the display of the keyless start guidance
screens.
Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirror
positions to a stored setting.
Setting Option
ENGLISH*1
FRENCH
SPANISH
−5°F ∼ ±0°F*1 ∼ 5°F
(U.S.)
−3°C ∼ ±0°C*1 ∼ 3°C
(Canada)
WITH REFUEL *1
MANUAL ONLY
IGN OFF
HIGH
MID*1
LOW
MAX
LOW
HIGH
MIN
MID*1
OFF
ON*1
OFF
ON*1
OFF
Page
99
100
Instruments and Controls
POSITION SETUP
(P.107)
Menu Item
LANGUAGE SELECTION
101
103
104
105
108
*1 : Default setting
*2 : Only on models with Keyless Access system
CONTINUED
93
08/07/29 17:36:28 31TK4600 0099 Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP*2
(P.110)
Menu Item
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
LIGHTING SETUP
(P.115)
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT
AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
*1 : Default setting
*2 : Only on models with Keyless Access system
94
Description
Changes which doors unlock when you use the
remote or grab the driver’s door handle.
Causes some exerior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the
sensor on the driver’s door handle.
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor on
the driver’s door handle.
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors.
Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
Changes the timing of when the headlights come
on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO
position.
Setting Option
DRIVER DOOR *1
ALL DOORS
ON*1
OFF
ON*1
OFF
60 sec
30 sec*1
60 sec
30 sec
15 sec*1
MAX
HIGH
MID*1
Page
111
112
113
15 sec
116
0 sec
117
LOW
MIN
118
08/07/29 17:36:33 31TK4600 0100 Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
(P.120)
Menu Item
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
DEFAULT ALL
(P.129)
Changes when the doors automatically unlock.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter on the first push.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
Setting Option
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEHICLE SPEED*
OFF
SHIFT TO P/DRIVER DOOR *
SHIFT TO P/ALL DOORS
IGN OFF/DRIVER DOOR
IGN OFF/ALL DOORS
OFF
DRIVER DOOR *
ALL DOORS
ON*
OFF
90 sec
60 sec
30 sec*
SET
CANCEL
Page
121
123
125
126
127
129
* : Default setting
95
Instruments and Controls
KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Description
Changes when the doors automatically lock.
08/07/29 17:38:52 31TK4600 0101 Multi-Information Display
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Customize Settings
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP*
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
*: Only on models with keyless
access system
96
If you do not make any changes,
select ‘‘EXIT,’’ the display returns to
normal display.
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 129 .
08/09/04 17:23:00 31TK4600 0102 Multi-Information Display
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
* : On models with keyless access system only
Instruments and Controls
DEFAULT ALL
See page 129.
METER SETUP
See page 98.
POSITION
KEYLESS
LIGHTING
SETUP
ACCSESS SETUP* SETUP
See page 107. See page 110.
See page 115.
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
See page 120.
97
08/07/29 17:39:07 31TK4600 0103 Multi-Information Display
Meter Setup
Here are the five or six custom
settings for the meter setup:
See page 99.
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A INFO
RESET
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION
On models with keyless access
system
See page 100.
See page 101.
See page 103.
KEYLESS START GUIDANCE
SCREENS
See page 104.
On models with keyless access system only
See page 105.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
98
08/07/29 17:39:16 31TK4600 0104 Multi-Information Display
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Language Selection
There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
99
Instruments and Controls
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
08/07/29 17:39:24 31TK4600 0105 Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
U.S. models
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
100
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the setting.
Canadian models
The displayed number is the current
adjustment above or below the
outside temperature. Select this icon
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.
08/07/29 17:39:34 31TK4600 0106 Multi-Information Display
Trip Computer Trip A Info Reset
U.S. models
Canadian models
WITH REFUEL − The Trip A
information is reset every time you
refuel your vehicle.
Instruments and Controls
You can select the reset timing of
the Trip A information: Trip A,
Average Fuel Economy A, Average
Vehicle Speed A, and Elapsed Time
A.
There are three reset choices you
can make:
MANUAL ONLY − You can reset
the Trip A information, when Trip A
is displayed (see page 81 ).
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
IGN OFF − The Trip A information
is reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
See page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
101
08/07/29 17:39:40 31TK4600 0107 Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
COMPUTER TRIP A INFO RESET’’
and repeat the procedure again.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
102
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
08/07/29 17:39:48 31TK4600 0108 Multi-Information Display
Adjust Alarm Volume
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Select the desired level by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST ALARM VOLUME’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
103
Instruments and Controls
Select the warning alarm volume
from three levels.
08/07/29 17:39:56 31TK4600 0109 Multi-Information Display
Auto Interior Illumination
While the headlight switch is turned
on, the interior lights gradually dim,
as the outside light level gets low.
You can customize at which outside
light level the lights start to dim.
There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW
and MIN levels and OFF for the auto
interior illumination settings.
If you want the illuminations to start
dimming as early as possible, select
MAX. For illuminations to start
dimming as late as possible, select
MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW
for levels in between.
To disable the auto interior
illumination function, select OFF.
104
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
08/09/04 17:23:08 31TK4600 0110 Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
INTERIOR ILLUMINATION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
On models with keyless access system
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
CONTINUED
105
Instruments and Controls
When this item is set to ON, you will
see some guidance messages on the
multi-information display. You can
change this setting between on and
off. For more information on start
guidance messages, see page 181 .
08/07/29 17:40:09 31TK4600 0111 Multi-Information Display
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
106
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS START GUIDANCE
SCREENS’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
08/07/29 17:40:15 31TK4600 0112 Multi-Information Display
Position Setup
You can customize the MEMORY
POSITION LINK setting in position
setup.
See page 108.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the custom setting then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
107
Instruments and Controls
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
08/07/29 17:40:23 31TK4600 0113 Multi-Information Display
Memory Position Link
When Memory Position Link is set
to ON, the driver’s seat and the
outside mirrors move to the
positions stored in memory. To
cause the memory to activate, open
the driver’s door with the remote
transmitter. On models with keyless
access system, open the driver’s
door with the remote, or grab the
door handle while carrying the
remote.
To set the memory positions, see
page 164 .
On models with keyless access system
For information on using the remote,
see page 167 .
108
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘POSITION
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
08/07/29 17:40:27 31TK4600 0114 Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
109
08/07/29 17:40:36 31TK4600 0115 Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Setup
On models with keyless access system
There are three custom settings for
the keyless access setup:
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
While ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP’’
is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
See page 111.
See page 112.
See page 113.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
110
08/07/29 17:40:44 31TK4600 0116 Multi-Information Display
Door Unlock Mode
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL
DOORS by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, then enter your selection
by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘DOOR
UNLOCK MODE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
CONTINUED
111
Instruments and Controls
To select whether the driver’s door
or all doors unlock when you open
the driver’s door with the remote or
by grabbing the door handle (while
carrying the remote), follow these
instructions:
08/07/29 17:40:51 31TK4600 0117 Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Light Flash
When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH is set to ON, some exterior
lights blink twice when you unlock
the doors by grabbing the driver’s
door handle while carrying the
remote.
The same exterior lights blink once
when you lock the doors by pushing
the door lock button while carrying
the remote.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
112
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
08/07/29 17:40:58 31TK4600 0118 Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Beep
When you lock the doors by pushing
the door lock button while carrying
the remote, the beeper sounds once.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED
113
Instruments and Controls
When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is
set to ON, the beeper sounds twice
when you unlock the doors by
grabbing the drivers door handle
while carrying the remote.
08/07/29 17:41:04 31TK4600 0119 Multi-Information Display
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
114
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
08/07/29 17:41:13 31TK4600 0120 Multi-Information Display
Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
See page 116.
Instruments and Controls
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
See page 117.
See page 118.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
115
08/07/29 17:41:20 31TK4600 0121 Multi-Information Display
Interior Light Dimming Time
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors. To change how long
the lights stay on before they fade
out, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
116
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (15 SEC,
30 SEC, or 60 SEC) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
08/07/29 17:41:27 31TK4600 0122 Multi-Information Display
Headlight Auto Off Timer
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (60 SEC,
30 SEC, 15 SEC or 0 SEC) by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
117
Instruments and Controls
The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver’s door. On models with
keyless access system, the lights go
off after the selected time when you
close the driver’s door and take the
remote with you. To change how
long the lights stay on before they go
off, follow these instructions:
08/07/29 17:41:37 31TK4600 0123 Multi-Information Display
Auto Light Sensitivity
The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’
and repeat the procedure again.
118
HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat bright.
MID −
The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.
LOW −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat dark.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
08/07/29 17:41:42 31TK4600 0124 Multi-Information Display
Select the desired setting (MAX,
HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Instruments and Controls
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
119
08/07/29 17:41:52 31TK4600 0125 Multi-Information Display
Door/Window Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door setup:
See page 121.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’
is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
See page 123.
See page 125.
See page 126.
See page 127.
: Press the INFO button (▲/▼).
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
120
08/07/29 17:42:01 31TK4600 0126 Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Lock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
Instruments and Controls
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEHICLE SPEED −
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
16 km/h).
OFF −
The auto door lock is deactivated all
the time.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
121
08/07/29 17:42:05 31TK4600 0127 Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
122
08/07/29 17:42:13 31TK4600 0128 Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Unlock
There are five possible settings you
can choose from:
ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO P −
All the doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to Park.
DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFF −
The driver’s door unlocks when you
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
(0) position.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF − All
the doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
OFF − The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
CONTINUED
123
Instruments and Controls
DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO P
− The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to Park.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
See page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
08/07/29 17:42:20 31TK4600 0129 Multi-Information Display
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
If you choose ‘‘IGN OFF,’’ you will
see the above display.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
switch the door lock mode setting
between the driver’s door and all
doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter your selection.
124
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
08/07/29 17:42:29 31TK4600 0130 Multi-Information Display
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
and repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
125
Instruments and Controls
You can select whether the driver’s
door or all the doors unlock the first
time you press the unlock button on
the remote transmitter/keyless
access remote.
08/07/29 17:42:36 31TK4600 0131 Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter or the
keyless access remote, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the trunk
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 381 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
When you press the UNLOCK
button on the remote transmitter or
the keyless access remote to unlock
the driver’s door/all the doors
(depending on the customize
setting), the exterior lights blink
twice to verify that the door(s) is
unlocked and the security system is
turned off.
To turn this feature on or off, follow
these instructions.
126
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
08/07/29 17:42:43 31TK4600 0132 Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
127
Instruments and Controls
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter or the keyless
access remote, but do not open any
of the doors within 30 seconds, the
doors automatically relock, and the
security system sets.
08/07/29 17:42:49 31TK4600 0133 Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
128
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
08/07/29 17:42:57 31TK4600 0134 Multi-Information Display
DEFAULT ALL
To set the default settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
the default all setting display.
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
129
Instruments and Controls
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
08/07/29 17:43:06 31TK4600 0135 Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/
FOG LIGHTS
(P. 133, 137)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS
(P. 374)
PADDLE SHIFTERS (P. 512)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P. 137)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM BUTTONS
(P. 394)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P. 524)
HEADLIGHT WASHERS*2
(P. 132)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P. 131)
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (P. 177)
NAVIGATION DISPLAY*3
PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P. 134)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P. 139)
CENTER DISPLAY
(P. 215, 278)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON
(P. 139, 163)
HORN*1
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for
INTERFACE DIAL (P. 277)
*3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM /
SELECTOR KNOB*2
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
(P. 224)
SYSTEM
MULTI-INFORMATION
STEERING WHEEL
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 193)
(P. 420, 424)
DISPLAY BUTTONS
ADJUSTMENTS
KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT (P. 189)
(P. 78)
(P. 140)
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 386)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
130
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
Refer to the navigation system owner’s manual.
08/07/29 17:43:16 31TK4600 0136 Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle’s speed.
ADJUSTMENT RING
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay (
position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
CONTINUED
131
Instruments and Controls
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
Windshield Washers − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
08/07/29 17:43:22 31TK4600 0137 Windshield Wipers and Washers
Canadian SH-AWD models only
Headlight Washers
When you activate the windshield
washer with the headlights turned
on, the headlight washer will be
activated under certain conditions.
For more information, see Headlight
Washers section in the next column.
Canadian SH-AWD models only
HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
The headlight washers can be
operated at any time by pressing the
headlight washer button located next
to the steering wheel column. The
headlights must be turned on to use
this button. In addition, the headlight
washer operates without pressing
the button at the first time you turn
on the windshield washers after you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
132
The headlight washers use the same
fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.
08/07/29 17:43:31 31TK4600 0138 Turn Signals and Headlights
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
1. Turn Signal
2. Off
3. Parking and instrument panel
4. AUTO
5. Headlights on
6. High beams
7. Flash high beams
8. Fog lights off
9. Fog lights on
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and
ON Mode is the equivalent of ON
(II). See page 180 for ignition switch
and power mode comparison.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, or with the power mode in
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), you will
hear a reminder chime when you
open the driver’s door.
CONTINUED
133
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
08/07/29 17:43:39 31TK4600 0139 Headlights
High Beams − Push the left lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page 71 ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights and
all other exterior lights when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO. The lights
will come on automatically when the
outside light level becomes low (at
dusk, for example). The lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
The lights and indicator will turn off
automatically when the system
senses high ambient light.
134
The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the
position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
118 .
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
week or more). You should also turn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.
08/07/29 17:43:46 31TK4600 0140 Headlights
To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 117 .
LIGHT SENSOR
The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
If you remove the key (or the vehicle
is in VEHICLE OFF mode on models
with keyless access system), and the
driver’s door is opened and closed,
the automatic lighting off feature
activates with the headlight switch in
the ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, or
the lights turned on by setting the
switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door and get out, the lights turn
off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position).
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights on
reminder chime.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
See page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
135
Instruments and Controls
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you remove the key
and close the driver’s door.
08/07/29 17:43:53 31TK4600 0141 Headlights
When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the left
column to turn them on.
Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off or in
the
position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
136
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
08/07/29 17:44:01 31TK4600 0142 Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Fog Lights
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
Instrument Panel Brightness
ADJUSTMENT BUTTON
Adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel by pressing the +
or − button. Press the + button to
increase the brightness and the −
button to decrease it. The brightness
can be set differently for when the
light switch is on (
or
),
and when it is off.
CONTINUED
137
Instruments and Controls
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off.
08/07/29 17:44:06 31TK4600 0143 Instrument Panel Brightness
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. To cancel the glare
reduction function, set the
brightness to the highest level, then
press the + button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled.
U.S. model is shown.
The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.
138
When the brightness reaches the
maximum level, ‘‘BRIGHTNESS
MAXIMUM LEVEL’’ appears on the
display.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
navigation system, the navigation
system screen will also go to full
brightness. This can be helpful when
using the headlights during daylight
hours.
08/09/04 17:23:17 31TK4600 0144 Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button
Rear Window Defogger
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
models with keyless access system.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
U.S. model is shown.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger clears fog,
frost, and thin ice from the window.
Push the defogger button to turn it
on and off. The indicator in the
button comes on to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
within about 10 to 30 minutes
according to the outside temperature.
It also shuts off when you turn off
the ignition switch, or set the power
mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) on
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 163 .
139
Instruments and Controls
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
08/07/29 17:44:22 31TK4600 0145 Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
LEVER
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
140
08/07/29 17:44:30 31TK4600 0146 Keys and Locks
On models without keyless access
system
KEY NUMBER
TAG
MASTER
KEY
VALET
KEY
(GRAY)
You should have received a key
number tag with your key. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only an Acura-approved key blank.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle.
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the driver’s door lock.
You can keep the trunk pass-through
cover and the glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
CONTINUED
141
Instruments and Controls
Protect the key from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
08/07/29 17:44:38 31TK4600 0147 Keys and Locks
Retractable Master Key
RELEASE BUTTON
Push
Always make sure the key is fully
extended when you insert it to the
ignition switch. If the key is not fully
extended the immobilizer system
may not operate properly and
prevent the engine from starting.
On models with keyless access system
The key may come in contact with
your finger while being retracted or
extended. Make sure your fingers do
not touch the pivot of the key when
retracting or extending it.
BUILT-IN KEYS
The master key can be retracted into
the remote transmitter. To use the
key, push the release button to
release the key from the transmitter.
The key should be fully extended.
To retract the key, push the release
button and at the same time push the
key into the remote transmitter until
it is securely latched.
142
KEY NUMBER TAG
Each keyless access remote has the
built-in key. This key is used to lock/
unlock the doors when the remote
battery becomes weak and the
power door lock/unlock operation is
disabled. You cannot start the engine
with this key.
The built-in key (see page 191 ) fits
all the locks on your vehicle.
08/07/29 17:44:45 31TK4600 0148 Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Acura-approved key blanks.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key or set the
power mode to ON.
CONTINUED
143
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
08/07/29 17:44:51 31TK4600 0149 Immobilizer System
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key or
keyless access remote, contact your
dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you have lost your key or keyless
access remote and you cannot start
the engine, contact your dealer.
Always take the ignition key or the
keyless access remote with the built-in
key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle alone.
144
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
08/07/29 17:44:59 31TK4600 0150 Ignition Switch
On models without keyless access
system
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0)
position, the shift lever must be in
Park, and you must push the key in
slightly.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
145
Instruments and Controls
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
08/07/29 17:45:09 31TK4600 0151 Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
disabled. For more information, see
page 191 .
Lock
Unlock
Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all doors.
Pushing forward the lock tab on the
driver’s door unlocks only that door.
Lock
All doors can be locked from the
outside by using the key in the
driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the key, turn it
clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors unlock when you
turn the key a second time within a
few seconds.
LOCK TAB
You can customize the door lock/
unlock settings (see page 120 ).
To lock all doors, push the front of
the master door lock switch on
either front door, pull the lock tab
rearward on the driver’s door, or
turn the key* counterclockwise in
the outside lock on the driver’s door.
You can open or close the windows
and the moonroof by using the key
in the driver’s door (see page 197 ).
Unlock
RED INDICATOR
* On models with keyless access
system
The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
The built-in key can be used to lock/
unlock the doors when the remote
battery becomes weak and the
power door lock/unlock operation is
When the door is unlocked, you can
see the red indicator on the lock tab
above the inner door handle.
146
08/07/29 17:45:18 31TK4600 0152 Door Locks
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
lock tab rearward or push the front
of the master switch, then close the
door.
Default setting
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all
the doors lock automatically.
When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
Childproof Door Locks
On models without keyless access
system
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, lockout prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With any door open and the
key in the ignition switch, locking
with master door lock switch is
disabled. If the driver’s door is
closed, the lock tab on the driver’s
door is not disabled. Pulling the
driver’s lock tab rearward will lock
all doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pulling the lock tab
rearward, the driver’s door lock tab
pops out and unlocks the driver’s
door.
LEVER
Unlock
Lock
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
147
Instruments and Controls
On models without keyless access
system
Lockout Prevention
08/09/04 17:23:30 31TK4600 0153 Trunk
On models with keyless access system
If the doors are unlocked, press
the trunk release switch on the
trunk lid.
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
If the doors are locked, press the
trunk release switch on the trunk
lid with the remote in keyless
access operating range.
On models with keyless access system
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
You can open the trunk in any of the
following ways:
Press the trunk release button on
the driver’s door.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter
or the keyless access remote.
148
The trunk will lock when you lock
the driver’s door with the key*, the
keyless access remote, either master
door lock switch, or the lock tab on
the driver’s door.
To unlock the trunk, turn the key*
twice to unlock the doors, push the
rear of either master door lock
switch, or push UNLOCK twice on
the keyless access remote.
To open the trunk from the outside,
push the release switch, then lift up.
* : The built-in key can be used to
lock/unlock the doors and trunk
when the remote battery
becomes weak and the power
door lock/unlock operation is
disabled. For more information,
see page 191 .
08/09/04 17:23:41 31TK4600 0154 Trunk
BUTTON
RUBBER TAB
On all models
To close the trunk, use the inner
handle to lower the lid, then press
down on the back edge.
INNER PARTITION
COVER
If your vehicle’s battery goes dead or
is disconnected, you can open the
trunk from the rear seat by pulling
the trunk release tab through the
trunk pass-through.
Pull down the rear seat armrest. Pull
on the tab at the top of the inner
partition, and press on the button to
fully release the cover. Reach in and
locate the rubber tab, and pull it out.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging it,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard, page 57 .
CONTINUED
149
Instruments and Controls
TAB
INNER
HANDLE
08/09/04 17:23:52 31TK4600 0155 Trunk
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH
On models without keyless access
system
If you need to give the key to
someone else, give them the valet
key.
Emergency Trunk Opener
TRUNK RELEASE LEVER
On models with keyless access system
OFF
Vehicle with keyless access system is
shown.
To protect items in the trunk, you
can disable the trunk release button
on the driver’s door by turning off
the trunk main switch in the glove
box, locking the glove box, and
locking the trunk pass-through cover
with the master key or the built-in
key.
To use the valet function, remove
the built-in key from the remote by
pressing the button, then give that
remote to someone else as a valet
key (see page 192 ).
Emergency Fuel Lid Release
Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency fuel lid release in the
trunk. Refer to page 598 for how to
access it.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever in the direction pointed by an
arrow.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page 41 .
150
08/07/29 17:45:52 31TK4600 0156 Remote Transmitter
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
On models without keyless access
system
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash. When you push LOCK
twice within 5 seconds, you will hear
a beep to verify that the doors are
locked and the security system has
set. You cannot lock the doors if any
door is not fully closed or if the key
is in the ignition switch.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
The door activated spotlights come
on when you press the UNLOCK
button if the door activated position
is selected by pressing the light
control button (DOOR). If you do
not open any door within 30 seconds
(or whatever setting of the interior
light dimming time is set to), the
light(s) will fade out. If you relock
the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light(s) will go off
immediately.
On the keyless lock
acknowledgment, you can deactivate
the beep on locking and flashing of
the lights (see page 126 ).
To change the lock/unlock setting
and the relock timer setting, refer to
the customized settings on page 120 .
You can also open all power windows
and the moonroof from outside the
vehicle with the remote transmitter
(see page 197 ).
CONTINUED
151
Instruments and Controls
TRUNK
BUTTON
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door or all the
doors (depending on the keyless
memory setting). Press it twice to
unlock the other doors. Some
exterior lights will flash twice each
time you press the button.
08/07/29 17:46:04 31TK4600 0157 Remote Transmitter
TRUNK − Press this button for
about 1 second to open the trunk.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
152
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
KEYPAD COVER
Battery type: CR1616
On models with keyless access
system, see page 175 for how to
replace the battery on the keyless
access remote.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
SCREW
KEYPAD
NOTE: Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the screw
can strip out.
2. Separate the keypad from the
transmitter by pushing any button
from outside.
08/07/29 17:46:11 31TK4600 0158 Remote Transmitter
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
3. Place a cloth on the edge of the
keypad, and remove the upper half
by carefully prying on the edge
with a small flat-tip screwdriver or
coin.
5. Snap the two halves of the keypad,
then install the parts in reverse
order.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
153
Instruments and Controls
BATTERY
4. Remove the old battery and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same (− side facing up), then
insert it in the keypad.
08/09/04 17:24:03 31TK4600 0159 Remote Transmitter
Recalling a Memorized Driving
Position
Driver 1
Driver 2
The driving position memory
activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is
shown on the back of each
transmitter. Make sure you store
your desired driving position in the
memory that is activated by the
transmitter you normally carry.
Here are the settings activated with
the remote:
Customized settings
(see page 96 ).
When you unlock the driver’s door
with your remote transmitter, each
remote transmitter activates the
customized settings related to that
remote.
Driving position memory
(see page 164 ).
Audio system settings
(see page 224 ).
Climate control settings
(see page 214 ).
154
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote, the
driver’s seat (except power lumbar)
and outside mirrors move to the
positions stored in memory. An
indicator on one of the driving
position memory buttons on the
driver’s door also comes on.
You will also see the ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ message on the multiinformation display, depending on
which linked remote transmitter is
used.
08/09/04 17:24:20 31TK4600 0160 Seats
Raises or lowers the seat.
Front Seat Power Adjustments
See pages 13 − 15 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any lumbar adjustment.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0);
ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent
of ACCESSORY (I); and ON Mode is
the equivalent of ON (II). See page
Driver’s seat
180 for ignition switch and power
mode comparison.
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
(Driver’s seat only)
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
CONTINUED
155
Instruments and Controls
The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
08/07/29 17:46:39 31TK4600 0161 Seats
The driver’s seat includes a memory
feature. Two seat positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
can then select a memorized position
by pushing the appropriate memory
button. Refer to page 164 for how to
memorize and select the seat
positions.
Passenger’s seat
156
Head Restraints
See page 15 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
08/07/29 17:46:46 31TK4600 0162 Seats
Front
CUSHION
Rear Center
CUSHION
RELEASE
BUTTON
LEGS
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
RELEASE BUTTON
LEGS
Instruments and Controls
SEATBACK
SEAT-BACK
Adjusting the Head Restraint
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise a front or rear
center head restraint, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
157
08/07/29 18:06:30 31TK4600 0163 Seats
Rear Outer
Removing the Head Restraint
To remove a front or rear center
head restraint for cleaning or repair,
pull it up as far as it will go. Push the
release button, then pull the restraint
out of the seat-back.
Rear Outer
TILT BUTTON
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
TILT BUTTON
To lower either rear outer head
restraint for better visibility, press
the tilt button on the side of the head
restraint. It folds down backward. To
raise the rear outer head restraint,
pull up it on the rear by hand. Make
sure the head restraint locks in
position when you lower or raise it.
158
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
RELEASE BUTTON
To remove either rear outer head
restraint, push the tilt button, then
fold the head restraint backward.
Push the release button, then pull
the restraint out of the seat-back.
08/07/29 17:47:03 31TK4600 0164 Seats
Active Head Restraints
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by an Acura dealer.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Acura
replacement head restraints.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
159
Instruments and Controls
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.
08/07/29 17:47:10 31TK4600 0165 Seats
Armrest
Front
Trunk Pass-through Cover
BUTTON
Rear
TAB
INNER PARTITION
The lid of the console compartment
can be used as an armrest.
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.
A beverage holder is located in the
armrest.
160
COVER
To open the cover, pull down the
rear seat armrest. Pull on the tab at
the top of the inner partition, and
press on the button to fully release
the cover. To close the cover, swing
it up, and push firmly on the top.
Make sure it latches properly.
08/07/29 17:47:17 31TK4600 0166 Seats, Mirrors
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the passthrough are secured.
For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
master key(the built-in key on
models with keyless access system).
To lock the cover, insert the key, and
turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and
the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 57 .
INDICATOR
SENSOR
AUTO BUTTON
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
There is also a sensor on the back of
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and af f ect its
perf ormance.
CONTINUED
161
Instruments and Controls
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
Mirrors
08/07/29 17:47:26 31TK4600 0167 Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
3. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in
reverse, the selected mirror will
tilt down slightly to improve your
view as you parallel park. Shifting
out of reverse will return the
mirror to its original position.
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place
the selector switch in the left
position.
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
1. With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, move the selector
switch to the L (driver’s side), or R
(passenger’s side).
2. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
162
To tilt the passenger’s mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
To turn the feature off, place the
switch in the center position.
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 164 ).
08/07/29 17:47:32 31TK4600 0168 Mirrors
Power Mirror Heaters
This heated mirror function has a
timer (see page 139 ).
Instruments and Controls
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
163
08/07/29 17:47:41 31TK4600 0169 Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Seat, except for power lumbar, and
outside mirror positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
select a memorized position by
pushing the appropriate button or
using the appropriate remote
transmitter or the keyless access
remote (Driver 1 or Driver 2).
Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new driving position to the
memory unless the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine
start/stop button instead of an
ignition switch. ON Mode is the
equivalent of ON (II). See page
180 for ignition switch and power
mode comparison.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 155 ).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page 162 ).
164
MEMORY BUTTONS
SET BUTTON
3. Press and release the SET button
on the control panel. You will hear
a beep. Immediately press and
hold one of the memory buttons (1
or 2) until you hear two beeps.
The indicator in the memory
button will come on. The current
positions of the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors are now stored.
08/07/29 17:47:51 31TK4600 0170 Driving Position Memory System
Doing any of the following after
pressing the SET button will cancel
the storing procedure:
Selecting a Memorized Position
MEMORY BUTTONS
Readjust the seat position.
Readjust the outside mirror
position.
On models without keyless access
system
Turn the ignition switch out from
the ON (II) position.
On models with keyless access system
Change the power mode out from
ON.
To select a memorized position, do
this:
1. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
CONTINUED
165
Instruments and Controls
Not press a memory button within
5 seconds.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
08/07/29 17:47:58 31TK4600 0171 Driving Position Memory System
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps, and the indicator will
remain on.
To change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting, see page
108 .
166
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Press any button on the control
panel: SET, 1, or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized positions. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.
08/07/29 17:48:09 31TK4600 0172 Keyless Access System
On models with navigation system
The system may not work if:
The battery of the remote is weak.
There is strong electrical current
nearby.
You carry a cell phone, a laptop
computer, or other electrical
device near the remote.
The remote is covered by metal.
A vehicle is being operated with a
transmitter nearby.
When the remote battery is dead.
When the vehicle battery is dead.
Each keyless access remote has the
built-in key. This key is used to lock/
unlock the doors when the remote
battery becomes weak and the
power door lock/unlock operation is
disabled. You cannot start the engine
with this key.
Make sure the driver always carries
the remote/built-in key set.
Always keep the remote and the
built-in key away from any magnetic
material.
You should have received a key
number tag with your built-in key.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
Use only Acura-approved key blanks.
Protect the remote and the built-in
key from direct sunlight, high
temperature, and high humidity.
Do not drop the remote or the
built-in key, and do not set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the remote and the built-in key
away from liquids. If they get wet,
dry them immediately with a soft
cloth.
The built-in keys do not contain
batteries.
167
Instruments and Controls
Your vehicle has a keyless access
system. This system allows you to
operate the vehicle without an
ignition key. When you carry the
remote with you, you can lock/
unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk,
and start the engine.
08/07/29 17:48:18 31TK4600 0173 Keyless Access System
Keys
BUILT-IN KEYS
KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTES
OPERATING
RANGE
KEY NUMBER TAG
The following keys come with your
vehicle. Refer to page 191 for how to
separate the keys.
Built-in Key
This key is used to lock/unlock the
doors, glove box, and trunk passthrough cover.
168
Keyless Access Remote
This remote is used to lock/unlock
the doors and unlock the trunk.
When you carry the remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors, unlock the
trunk, and start the engine.
You can lock/unlock the doors
within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm)
radius from the outside door handle.
You can open the trunk within about
a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from
the trunk release switch.
Anyone can lock/unlock a door or
open the trunk if the remote is
within the operating range of the
door or the trunk.
08/07/29 17:48:29 31TK4600 0174 Keyless Access System
The remote may not work if:
It is too close to the vehicle.
It is above or below the vehicle,
even when it is within its operating
range.
Unlocking the Door(s)
To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page 111 .
Each front door has a LOCK/
UNLOCK feature.
When you unlock the door(s), some
exterior lights blink twice and the
system beeps twice.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
112 .
The handle of each front door has a
sensor. That sensor works with the
remote so you can automatically
unlock the door(s).
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 113 .
By default, only the driver’s door
unlocks when you grab its handle.
If you wear a glove while grabbing a
front door handle, the door sensor
may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
To unlock the remaining doors and
the trunk, press the remote or the
rear of the master door lock switch
on the driver’s door.
CONTINUED
169
Instruments and Controls
All the doors unlock when you grab
the handle of the front passenger’s
door.
08/07/29 17:48:39 31TK4600 0175 Keyless Access System
If you do not open any of the doors
within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
127 .
If a remote is within operating range
while you wash your vehicle or when
it is raining heavily, the door sensors
may respond by unlocking the doors.
Each unlock sensor does not operate
when:
Locking the Doors
The remote is not within the
operating range.
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
When the doors are unlocked.
The remote battery is dead.
The vehicle battery is dead.
DOOR LOCK SENSOR BUTTON
When you press the door lock sensor
button on the front door, all the
doors and the trunk will lock.
Before locking the doors, make sure
the remote is not inside the vehicle.
170
08/07/29 17:48:49 31TK4600 0176 Keyless Access System
When you lock the doors, some
exterior lights blink and the system
beeps once. If no exterior lights blink
and/or no beeper sounds, check to
see if the trunk or hood is open.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 113 .
Within 2 seconds of pressing the
door lock button to lock the doors or
locking the doors with remote, pull
the handle to make sure the doors
are actually locked. The door unlock
sensors will not operate for about 2
seconds after the doors are locked.
The remote is not within the
operating range.
Any door is open.
The power mode is not set to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The remote is in the keyless
access slot.
Door Lock Prevention
If you open the driver’s door, pull its
lock tab rearward on the door, and
shut it when the remote is inside the
vehicle, the driver’s door will unlock.
Make sure you carry the remote
with you when you lock the doors.
This function is also activated on the
front passenger’s door. If you open
the front passenger’s door, and shut
it after pulling its lock tab rearward
when the remote is inside the vehicle,
all doors will unlock.
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
The remote battery is dead.
The vehicle battery is dead.
171
Instruments and Controls
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
112 .
The door lock button does not work
if:
08/07/29 17:49:00 31TK4600 0177 Keyless Access System
Locking and Unlocking the Trunk
When you close the trunk with all
doors locked, the trunk will lock.
Opening and Closing the Trunk
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
When you unlock all the doors with
the remote, built-in key or power
door lock master switch, the trunk
will unlock.
The trunk cannot be locked if:
The remote is too close to the
trunk lid.
The remote is on the interior rear
panel.
The remote is too close to the
seat-back of the rear seat or the
seat cushion.
INNER HANDLE
When the trunk is locked, you can
open it in any of these ways:
Press the trunk release button
inside the vehicle.
Press the trunk button on the
remote.
Push the trunk release switch
when carrying the remote (if the
doors are locked).
172
To close the trunk, use the inner
handle to lower the lid, then press
down on the back edge.
08/07/29 17:49:08 31TK4600 0178 Keyless Access System
Before closing the trunk, make sure
the remote is not in the trunk.
Keyless Access Remote
LOCK
BUTTON
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 57 .
UNLOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
When you cannot set the security
system because the trunk or hood is
open, no exterior light blinks and/or
no beeper sounds.
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash. When you push the LOCK
button twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a beep to verify that the
doors are locked and the security
system is set.
CONTINUED
173
Instruments and Controls
LED
If you close the trunk when the
remote is in it, the system beeps, and
the trunk reopens.
You cannot lock the doors if any
door is not fully closed, if the remote
is in the keyless access remote slot,
or if the power mode is in any
position except the VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
08/07/29 17:49:15 31TK4600 0179 Keyless Access System
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Press it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button. The
door activated map lights (if the door
activated light switch is set) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any doors within 30 seconds, the
map lights fade out. If you relock the
doors with the remote before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
To change the door unlock mode
setting, see page 125 .
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME,’’ see page 116 .
If you unlock the doors with the
remote, but do not open any doors
within 30 seconds, the doors
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
127 .
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, see
page 126 .
174
TRUNK − Press this button for
about 1 second to open the trunk.
You cannot open the trunk with the
exterior trunk release switch if the
remote is in the keyless access
remote slot, or the power mode is in
any position except VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). You cannot open the trunk
with the remote if the trunk main
switch in the glove box is turned off.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote.
08/07/29 17:49:25 31TK4600 0180 Keyless Access System
Replacing the Remote Battery
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Replace the battery if necessary.
Battery type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the built-in key (see page
192 ).
2. Remove the upper half by
carefully prying on the edge with a
coin.
3. Replace the old battery with new
battery. Place the battery so the +
side is facing up. Snap the two
halves of the remote case back
together.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
175
Instruments and Controls
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
08/07/29 17:49:35 31TK4600 0181 Keyless Access System
Keyless Memory SettingsTM
Here are the settings activated with
the remote:
Driving position memory
(see page 164 ).
Keyless memory settings
(see page 96 ).
Audio system settings
(see page 223 ).
DRIVER’S ID
When you unlock the door with your
remote, each remote activates the
keyless memory settings related to
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back
of each remote.
176
Climate control settings
(see page 214 ).
Navigation system preferences
(see the navigation system
manual).
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
08/07/29 17:49:41 31TK4600 0182 Keyless Access System
Engine Start/Stop Button
Operating Range
Make sure you know where the remote
is when you are inside the vehicle.
Make sure you always carry the remote
with you.
The engine may not run, and some
malfunctions may occur, if the
remote is outside the vehicle.
The engine may not start if the
remote is subjected to strong radio
waves.
Also, the engine may not start if the
remote is too close to the windows.
177
Instruments and Controls
Remember that you can start the engine
when the remote is inside the vehicle.
08/07/29 17:49:48 31TK4600 0183 Keyless Access System
Engine Start/Stop Button
Operation
This system uses the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch to start and stop the engine. If
you are carrying the keyless access
remote, you can start the engine by
pressing the engine start/stop
button with the brake pedal
depressed. You can also stop the
engine by pushing this button when
the vehicle is stopped.
Switching the Power Modes
The keyless access system has four
power modes: VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK), ACCESSORY, ON, and
START.
Each time you press the engine
start/stop button while carrying the
keyless access remote, the power
mode switches between VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, and
ON.
You can start the engine at any time
by pressing the engine start/stop
button, while pressing the brake
pedal, with the shift lever in Park or
neutral position.
178
Changing the Power Mode without
Starting the Engine
To change the power mode without
turning on the engine, press the
engine start/stop button without
pressing the brake pedal. The power
mode will be changed as shown on
the next page.
08/07/29 17:49:56 31TK4600 0184 Keyless Access System
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
How the mode is switched depends
on the shift lever position (with or
without the shift lever in Park).
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button comes on green.
Some electrical components such as the
audio system and accessory power sockets
can be operated.
ON
Indicator in the button remains green when
the engine is not running.
(If the engine is running,this indicator is off.)
All electrical components can be used.
: Press the engine start/stop button.
: Press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in P.
: Shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button.
To change the mode from ON to
ACCESSORY with the shift lever
position in Park, press the engine
start/stop button twice.
To change the mode from
ACCESSORY to OFF, shift to Park,
then press the engine start/stop
button twice.
NOTE: If the keyless access system
main switch in the glove box is off,
make sure to insert the keyless
access remote into the keyless
access slot to turn on your vehicle’s
power mode. For more information,
refer to page 187 .
179
Instruments and Controls
With the shift lever in Park, the
power mode changes from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) when you
push the start button.
08/07/29 17:50:09 31TK4600 0185 Keyless Access System
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position
Without Keyless
Access System
Power Mode
With Keyless
Access System and
Engine Start/Stop
Button
180
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical components
can be used.
Engine is turned off.
Some electrical components
such as the audio system
and accessory power
sockets can be operated.
Normal key position while
driving.
Several instrument panel
indicators come on as a test
when the ignition switch is
turned from the
ACCESSORY (I) to ON (II)
position.
Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.
VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)
ACCESSORY
ON
START
Indicator-Off
Engine is turned off
and power is shut
down.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical
components can be
used.
Indicator-Green
Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and
accessory power sockets
can be operated.
Green OFF
IndicatorGreen (engine is turned off)
Off (engine is running)
All electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-Off
The mode
automatically returns
to ON after the
engine starts. The
indicator goes off.
08/07/29 17:50:19 31TK4600 0186 Keyless Access System
Starting the Engine
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
Starting Guidance
TO START ENGINE
BRAKE PEDAL
You can start the engine in any
power mode.
To start the engine:
1. Move the shift lever to Park (P).
2. Depress the brake pedal and press
the engine start/stop button.
After you get in the vehicle and close
the door, you will see the ‘‘TO
START ENGINE:’’ message on the
multi-information display. The ‘‘TO
TURN ACCESSORY ON:’’ message
will be shown after three seconds.
The display switches between the
‘‘TO START ENGINE:’’ and ‘‘TO
TURN ACCESSORY ON:’’ messages
every three seconds.
CONTINUED
181
Instruments and Controls
TO TURN ACCESSORY ON
When the keyless access system
main switch in the glove box is off,
the ‘‘TO START ENGINE:’’ message
will be shown after you insert the
remote into the slot. Each time you
press the engine start/stop button,
the ‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE
INTO SLOT’’ message is shown on
the multi-information display.
08/07/29 17:50:24 31TK4600 0187 Keyless Access System
TO UNLOCK WHEEL
If the keyless access remote battery
dies, you may have to use the built-in
key to unlock/lock the vehicle. The
built-in key is stored inside the
keyless access remote (see page
191 ).
After entering the vehicle, insert the
keyless access remote into the slot
to start the engine (see page 189 ).
If the steering wheel is locked, the
engine cannot start. The multiinformation display shows you the
above message and the indicator in
the engine start/stop button blinks.
To unlock the steering wheel, apply
force by turning it left and right
while pressing the engine start/stop
button at the same time.
182
08/09/12 15:58:18 31TK4600 0188 Keyless Access System
Stopping the Engine
Operation Guidance
SHIFT TO PARK
You can only place the vehicle in the
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode if the
transmission is in Park. You will see
the ‘‘SHIFT TO PARK’’ message on
the multi-information display if you
open the driver’s door with the shift
lever in a position other than P
(Park). In this case, the power mode
will change to ACCESSORY if the
door is opened.
After shifting into Park, you will see
the ‘‘TO TURN VEHICLE OFF:’’
message on the multi-information
display. Press the engine start/stop
button twice with your foot off the
brake pedal to change the power
mode from ACCESSORY to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
CONTINUED
183
Instruments and Controls
To turn the vehicle off when the
vehicle is completely stopped, shift
to Park (P), then press the engine
start/stop button. The engine stops
and the power mode switches from
ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
TO TURN VEHICLE OFF
08/09/12 15:58:27 31TK4600 0189 Keyless Access System
Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure it is off. You can verify if the
power is off by checking the engine
start/stop button LED indicator.
If you open the driver’s door in the
ACCESSORY, a beeper will sound.
You will also see a ‘‘TO TURN
VEHICLE OFF:’’ message on the
multi-information display.
Press the engine start/stop button
twice with your foot off the brake
pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure it is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
184
Emergency Engine Stop
The engine start/stop button may be
used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while
driving. If you must stop the engine,
do either of the following operations:
Press and hold the engine start/
stop button for three seconds.
Firmly press the engine start/stop
button three times.
Do not press the switch while driving
unless it is absolutely necessary for
the engine to be switched off.
If you are driving, the power mode
switches from ON to ACCESSORY
whenever you perform either
procedure. However, the steering
wheel will NOT lock. If the vehicle is
stopped and in Park, the power mode
will change to OFF, however, the
steering wheel will NOT lock.
08/07/29 17:50:47 31TK4600 0190 Keyless Access System
Beeper and Message
Keyless Remote Not Detected
The displayed message goes away
when you bring the remote back
inside the vehicle, and close the door.
If you take the keyless access
remote out of the vehicle and close
the door with the power mode ON,
the inside and outside beepers sound
and a ‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE NOT
DETECTED’’ message will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
If you pass the remote through an
open window, the engine will not
start, and the vehicle will remain in
its current mode. Also, even when
the remote is inside the vehicle, the
beeper may sound when the location
of the remote is not detected due to
surrounding conditions. It is not a
failure. Make sure that you carry the
remote with you.
CONTINUED
185
Instruments and Controls
If the engine is running and you take
the remote out of the vehicle, it will
continue to run. Once the power
mode is changed to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK), the engine will not restart
until you bring back a remote into
the vehicle.
The engine does not restart if you
push the engine start/stop button to
select the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
mode when the remote is outside the
vehicle. Check where the remote is.
Make sure that you carry the remote
with you when you operate the
engine start/stop button.
08/07/29 17:50:54 31TK4600 0191 Keyless Access System
The outside beeper sounds when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY, and
a door is opened, then closed.
Keyless Remote Low Battery
The battery in the remote normally
last about 2 years. To ensure
maximum battery life, do not store
the remote close to electrical devices
such as computers or TVs. When the
multi-information display shows
‘‘CHANGE KEYLESS REMOTE
BATTERY,’’ replace the battery as
soon as possible (see page 175 ).
186
If the remote battery becomes weak
and the power door lock/unlock
operation is disabled, you should
insert the remote into the keyless
access remote slot to set the power
mode and start the engine. After
inserting the remote to the slot,
operate the engine start/stop button
as previously described (see pages
178 and 181 ). For more information
on the keyless access slot, see page
189 .
Inserting the remote does not charge
the remote battery. You should
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
08/09/04 17:24:32 31TK4600 0192 Keyless Access System
Keyless Access Remote System
Main Switch
NOTE: Turning off the keyless
access system will disable lockout
prevention.
OFF
MAIN SWITCH
This switch is in the glove box. You
can cancel the keyless access system
features, which are locking/
unlocking the doors, unlocking the
trunk, and starting the engine while
carrying the keyless access remote.
To cancel the system, turn the
keyless access system main switch
off by pushing it down.
This indicator normally comes on for
several seconds when you change
the power mode to ON.
CONTINUED
187
Instruments and Controls
With the keyless access remote
system main switch off, you should
insert the keyless access remote into
the keyless remote slot to start the
engine. For more information, see
page 189 .
Keyless Access System
Indicator
According to the message on the
multi-information display, this
indicator has two indications. A
‘‘CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS
SYSTEM’’ message indicates a
problem with the keyless access
system. A ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
STARTING SYSTEM’’ message
indicates a problem with the keyless
starting system.
08/07/29 17:51:12 31TK4600 0193 Keyless Access System
Check Keyless Access System
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR
The multi-information display
shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM.’’
Check Keyless Starting System
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR
In this case, use the built-in key to
lock/unlock the doors and insert the
keyless access remote into the slot
to start the engine (see page 189 ).
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer if:
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer if:
The keyless access system
indicator comes on and stays on
while you are driving.
The keyless access system
indicator comes on and stays on
while you are driving.
The indicator comes on after the
engine has started.
The indicator comes on with the
power mode ON.
188
08/07/29 17:51:20 31TK4600 0194 Keyless Access System
The multi-information display
shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
STARTING SYSTEM.’’
SLOT
KEYLESS
ACCESS
REMOTE
Always insert the keyless access
remote fully into the slot. To remove
it, place the vehicle in the VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK) mode, then pull out
the keyless access remote.
If the keyless access remote has
been inserted into the slot, it will
lock into place when the power is on.
The slot will unlock when the power
is turned off.
In either case, you have to insert the
keyless access remote into the
keyless access remote slot to set the
power mode and start the engine.
NOTE: If the keyless access remote
does not come out of the slot easily,
try to push it in before pulling it out.
Make sure the vehicle is in
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.
If the remote battery becomes
weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
When the keyless access remote
system main switch in the glove
box is set to off.
CONTINUED
189
Instruments and Controls
In this case, you should not shut off
your engine until you are in a safe
location or at your dealer, as your
vehicle may not restart.
Keyless Access Remote Slot
08/07/29 17:51:28 31TK4600 0195 Keyless Access System
To avoid damaging the slot, do not
insert any other objects into the slot
or put a sticker on the keyless access
remote.
Operation Guidance
If you turn off the vehicle and leave
the remote in the keyless access
remote slot, you will hear a reminder
beeper, and one of the following
messages will appear on the multiinformation display.
Inserting the remote does not charge
the remote battery. If necessary, you
should replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Each time you press the engine
start/stop button, you will see the
‘‘INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE
INTO SLOT’’ message on the multiinformation display in the following
situations:
When the keyless access system
main switch (see page 187 ) is off.
190
When you press the engine start/
stop button and the keyless access
remote is not in the vehicle.
08/07/29 17:51:33 31TK4600 0196 Keyless Access System
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can press the engine
start/stop button twice to set the
vehicle into the VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) mode.
If the vehicle is left in the
ACCESSORY mode, the ‘‘TO TURN
VEHICLE OFF’’ message is shown
on the multi-information display. If
the vehicle is left in the VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK) modes, the ‘‘REMOVE
KEYLESS REMOTE FROM SLOT’’
message is shown on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
191
Instruments and Controls
Built-in key and Remote
The built-in key can be used to lock/
unlock the doors and the trunk when
the remote battery becomes weak
and the power door lock/unlock
operation is disabled.
08/07/29 17:51:40 31TK4600 0197 Keyless Access System
The keyless access system uses an
electric field to identify the remote.
BUILT-IN KEY
If you use medical equipment such
as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your
doctor if the electric field used by
the remote will affect it.
RELEASE BUTTON
To remove the built-in key, pull it out
while pressing the release button. To
reinstall the built-in key, push the
key into the remote until it clicks.
To avoid damaging the remote and
the built-in key, never pull on the
built-in key unless you are pressing
the release button.
192
Valet Function
The trunk and glove box cannot be
opened when you turn the trunk
main switch off and lock the glove
box and trunk pass-through cover
with the built-in key. Then, the trunk
cannot be opened by using the
remote or the exterior trunk release
switch.
Remove the built-in key from the
remote by pressing the button, then
give that remote to someone else as
a valet key.
08/07/29 17:51:47 31TK4600 0198 Seat Heaters
HEATERS
Driver’s Seat
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Push the right side of the switch, HI,
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
CONTINUED
193
Instruments and Controls
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
Passenger’s Seat
08/07/29 17:51:52 31TK4600 0199 Seat Heaters
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
194
08/07/29 17:51:58 31TK4600 0200 Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
AUTO − To open either front
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, then release it. The window
automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
To close either front window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
CONTINUED
195
Instruments and Controls
FRONT PASSENGER’S
MAIN SWITCH
WINDOW SWITCH
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 18:06:35 31TK4600 0201 Power Windows
When you push the main switch in,
the indicator comes on and the
passengers’ windows cannot be
raised or lowered. Use the main
switch when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch
again. The switch will pop out and
the indicator will go off.
The windows and the main switch
will operate for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch
(set VEHICLE OFF mode on models
with keyless access system).
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
196
Auto Reverse
If either front window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
NOTE: Only on the driver’s window,
the auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the
switch.
08/07/29 18:06:46 31TK4600 0202 Power Windows
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter/Keyless Access
Remote
Open
Close
3. To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Key or the
Built-in key
UNLOCK BUTTON
Instruments and Controls
UNLOCK BUTTON
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
remaining doors unlock, and all
four windows and the moonroof
start to open. To stop the windows
and moonroof, release the button.
Open
Close
BUILT-IN KEY
Vehicle with keyless access system
Vehicle without keyless access system
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof from outside with the
remote transmitter.
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.
You can open and close the windows
and moonroof with the key in the
driver’s door lock.
To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
CONTINUED
197
08/07/29 18:06:54 31TK4600 0203 Power Windows
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. All four windows and the
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.
4. To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
4. To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
198
08/07/29 18:07:01 31TK4600 0204 Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH
Open
Tilt
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch on
the front ceiling to operate the
moonroof. You must turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
To open the moonroof, pull back on
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, push the switch forward
and hold it. Release the switch to
stop the operation.
AUTO − To open the moonroof
fully, pull back the moonroof switch
firmly, then release it. The moonroof
automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
CONTINUED
199
Instruments and Controls
Close
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 18:07:08 31TK4600 0205 Moonroof
To open or close the moonroof
partially, lightly pull the switch back
or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.
Auto Reverse
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
200
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch, on
models with keyless access system,
set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK). Opening either front
door cancels this function.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
You can use the remote transmitter/
keyless access remote or the key/
built-in key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
197 for details.
08/07/29 18:07:13 31TK4600 0206 Parking Brake
PARKING
BRAKE LEVER
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 65 ).
Instruments and Controls
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
65 ).
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
201
08/09/04 17:35:59 31TK4600 0207 Interior Convenience Items
FRONT DOOR POCKET with BEVERAGE HOLDER
VANITY MIRROR
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
COAT HOOK
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SUN VISOR
REAR DOOR POCKET
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
SIDE POCKET
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
BEVERAGE HOLDER in REAR
SEAT ARMREST
CARGO HOOKS
202
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
08/09/04 17:36:07 31TK4600 0208 Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Front
Rear
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Open the front beverage holder by
sliding its cover backward.
To open the rear beverage holder,
pull out the lid by the tab. To close it,
push it down.
203
Instruments and Controls
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders (if equipped) when you open
or close the doors. Use only
resealable containers in the door
pockets.
08/07/29 18:07:33 31TK4600 0209 Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Sockets
Front
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Slide the lid
forward.
Pull up the lid.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects getting into the
socket.
Your vehicle has two accessory
power sockets. One is next to the
shift lever. The other is in the
console compartment.
To access the front accessory socket,
slide the lid forward until it latches.
To close it, push in on the lid to slide
it backward.
204
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and
ON Mode is the equivalent of ON
(II). See page 180 for ignition switch
and power mode comparison.
08/09/04 17:36:17 31TK4600 0210 Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Console Compartment
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling out
the handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key or the built-in key on
models with keyless access system.
The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
To open the console compartment,
push in on the lever and lift the
armrest. To close, lower the armrest,
and push it down until it latches.
Make sure to slide back the tray
before opening the console
compartment.
CONTINUED
205
Instruments and Controls
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
08/07/29 18:07:49 31TK4600 0211 Interior Convenience Items
Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor
SUN VISOR
Slide
You can put small items in the
sliding tray located in the console
compartment lid. To use the tray,
push it in to open it, then slide out
fully. Make sure to slide back the
tray firmly until you hear a click
when not in use.
206
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror lights come on
when you pull up the cover.
To use a sun visor, pull it down. You
can also use a sun visor at the side
window. Remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
You can extend the sun visor further
by pulling it back.
08/07/29 18:07:58 31TK4600 0212 Interior Convenience Items
Do not use the sun visor extension
feature over the rear view mirror.
Center Pocket
Sunglasses Holder
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Push
Push
To open the center pocket, push on
the lid. It will unlatch and swing up.
To close it, push the lid down until it
latches.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the lid. It will unlatch and swing
down. To close it, push it until it
latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
CONTINUED
207
Instruments and Controls
Make sure to slide the sun visor
back to its original position before
flipping it back in place.
08/07/29 18:08:04 31TK4600 0213 Interior Convenience Items
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
Coat Hook
COAT HOOK
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
To use a coat hook, slide it out
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is pulled up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
208
08/09/04 17:36:35 31TK4600 0214 Interior Lights
To turn off the setting, press the
OFF button. On the door activated
position, pressing the DOOR button
again also turns off the setting.
Light Control Buttons
Front
DOOR ACTIVATED
MAP LIGHT BUTTON
ON
Your vehicle has the light control
buttons on the front ceiling. With
these buttons, you can select three
positions: OFF, Door (door activated
position), and ON. To select a
position, press the appropriate
button.
When you press the DOOR button,
the green indicator in the button
comes on as a reminder.
The individual map lights in the
front and rear come on when any
door is opened, when the remote
transmitter/remote (on models
with keyless access system) is
used to unlock the doors (see page
151 ). When the doors are closed,
each light can be turned on and off
by pushing the map light button
(
).
After all doors are closed tightly, the
lights dim slightly, then fade out in
about 30 seconds.
Rear
OFF position:
The front individual map lights
can be turned on and off by
pressing each map light button
(
).
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
116 .
With any door left open, the lights
stay on about 15 minutes, then go
out.
The rear individual map lights
cannot be turned on.
CONTINUED
209
Instruments and Controls
Front
OFF
Door (Door activated position):
08/09/04 17:36:46 31TK4600 0215 Interior Lights
On models without keyless access
system
The lights also come on when the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
If any map light is left on when the
ignition switch is turned off or the
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode is set,
and all doors are closed, it will turn
off when the vehicle is locked with
the remote transmitter, or after 15
minutes.
Individual Map Lights
Front
On models with keyless access system
The lights also come on when the
power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
ON position:
All the individual map lights come
on and stay on.
Rear
Turn on the front individual map
lights by pushing each map light
button (
). Push the button
again to turn it off. When the door
activated position is selected with the
light control button, the rear map
lights can be turned on by pushing
each map light button (
). Push
the button again to turn it off.
210
08/07/29 18:08:31 31TK4600 0216 Interior Lights
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy light in each front door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
On models without keyless access
system
Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
in the ignition switch. This light
comes on when you open the driver’s
door. It fades out in about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights between the
front map lights come on when the
parking lights are turned on. To
adjust its brightness, press either of
the instrument panel brightness
control buttons (+ or −) with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
In addition to the courtesy light on
the ceiling, the driver’s ambient foot
light comes on.
211
Instruments and Controls
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 18:08:38 31TK4600 0217 Interior Lights
Keyless Access Remote Slot Light
On models with Keyless Access
System
Set the vehicle mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Remove the keyless access remote
from the keyless access remote
slot.
LIGHTS
Your vehicle has a keyless access
remote slot light. The light comes on
when you:
Open any door.
212
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds (depending on the
interior light dimming timer setting).
The light turns off before 30 seconds
have elapsed if you lock the driver’s
door.
08/07/29 18:08:44 31TK4600 0218 Features
The climate control system in your
vehicle provides a comfortable
driving environment in all weather
conditions.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
Climate Control System ................ 214
Using Automatic Climate
Control .................................... 216
Dual Temperature and Mode
Control .................................... 220
Models without navigation system
Audio System ................................. 224
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 225
Playing the XM Radio ................. 233
Playing Discs .................................. 240
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 250
Protecting Your Discs ................... 251
Playing an iPod ............................. 254
iPod Error Messages .................. 262
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 263
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 271
Bluetooth Audio System ............. 272
Models with navigation system
Audio System ................................. 277
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 278
Playing the XM Radio ................. 292
Playing a Disc ................................. 300
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 312
Protecting Your Discs ................... 313
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD)
Audio ........................................... 316
Playing an iPod ............................. 345
iPod Error Messages .................. 354
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 355
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 366
Bluetooth Audio System ............. 367
AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 372
Remote Audio Controls................. 374
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 375
Radio Theft Protection.................. 376
Setting the Clock ........................... 377
Security System ............................. 381
Compass.......................................... 382
Cruise Control ................................ 386
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 389
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models without navigation
system) ................................... 392
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models with navigation
system) ................................... 420
AcuraLink (U.S. models only) ..... 467
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 483
213
Features
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Climate Control Sensors ........... 222
Audio System ................................. 223
08/09/04 17:36:52 31TK4600 0219 Climate Control System
Models without navigation system
DRIVER’S SIDE DISPLAY
DRIVER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE AUTO
BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST
BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
214
08/07/29 18:08:56 31TK4600 0220 Climate Control System
Models with navigation system
DRIVER’S SIDE DISPLAY
DRIVER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE AUTO BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE MODE
CONTROL BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST
BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
215
Features
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
CENTER
DISPLAY
08/09/04 17:37:04 31TK4600 0221 Climate Control System
Voice Control System
On models with navigation system
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control. See the
Navigation section in your quick
start guide for an overview of this
system, and the navigation system
manual for complete details.
Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote transmitter (keyless
access remote on models with
navigation system), the driver’s ID
(Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected,
and the climate control settings are
turned to the respective mode
automatically with the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position, or the
power mode ON.
216
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select, and to remove moisture
from the air and make the interior
dry. The system also adjusts the fan
speed and airflow levels.
1. Press the Driver’s or Passenger’s
AUTO button. You will see AUTO
and the selected temperature on
the appropriate side of the display
(in the center display on models
with navigation system).
2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control switch.
You can set the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s
side temperature separately.
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference. The system also
dehumidify the interior.
Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature and
the passenger’s side temperature can
be set separately. Push up the switch
of the appropriate temperature
control to increase the temperature
of airflow. Push down the switch to
decrease it. Each set temperature is
shown in the display (in the center
display on models with navigation
system).
08/07/29 18:09:15 31TK4600 0222 Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
You can also select the appropriate
mode on the driver’s side and the
passenger’s side separately. To
change a mode, press and release
the appropriate side mode control
button. This will take the mode
control out of AUTO mode.
On models with navigation system
SYNC Button
When you press this button, the
indicator in the button comes on, and
the passenger’s side temperature
and mode control is synchronized to
the driver’s side set temperature and
mode control. Changing the
passenger’s side temperature or
mode control makes the indicator go
off and takes the system out of
SYNC mode.
ON/OFF Button
Each time you press this button, the
climate control system switches
between on and off. Turning on the
system with this button selects your
last climate control selection.
To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior
temperature is independently
regulated for the driver and front
passenger according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
based on the information of the sun
light sensor and the sun’s position
217
Features
When you adjust a fan control, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
which is updated automatically by
the navigation’s global positioning
system (GPS). If one side of the
vehicle is getting too much sun, the
system lowers the temperature only
on that side.
08/07/29 18:09:27 31TK4600 0223 Climate Control System
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Fan Control
Press the
button to increase the
fan speed and airflow. Press the
button to decrease it.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display
(in the center display on models with
navigation system).
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent through the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
218
08/07/29 18:09:40 31TK4600 0224 Climate Control System
Air flows from the floor
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 139 ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
The driver’s side mode and the
passenger’s side mode can be
selected separately. Use the
appropriate mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
This mode can only be selected from
the driver’s side, however the
passenger’s side controls can still
change the temperature.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Windshield Defroster Button
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, the fan speed
automatically increases. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the center and corner vents
on the dashboard. To close the vents,
rotate the wheel on the side of each
center and corner vent.
Select
window.
to help clear the rear
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
CONTINUED
219
Features
Mode Controls
vents.
08/07/29 18:09:48 31TK4600 0225 Climate Control System
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When the indicator in the
button is on, the SYNC
indicator also comes on. The front
passenger’s temperature cannot be
set separately from the driver’s.
The climate control system adjusts
the interior humidity and select the
defroster mode automatically if you
select the driver’s side AUTO mode.
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE
MODE CONTROL
SWITCH
SYNC BUTTON
Dual Temperature and Mode
Control
Your vehicle has two temperature
control switches and two mode
control buttons, one for the driver,
and one for the front passenger.
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side temperature and mode can be
controlled independently.
220
U.S. model with navigation system is shown.
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH
PASSENGER’S
SIDE MODE
CONTROL SWITCH
08/07/29 18:09:55 31TK4600 0226 Climate Control System
Synchronized Control
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
Features
The selected temperatures and
mode appear in the display (in the
center display on models with
navigation system). When the
indicator in the SYNC button is on,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature and mode by
pushing the driver’s side
temperature control switch up or
down.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or
.
REAR FLOOR AIR DUCTS
221
08/07/29 18:10:02 31TK4600 0227 Climate Control System
Rear Ventilation
The airflow from the rear vents can
be adjusted when either AUTO
mode (driver or passenger) is
selected or the fan mode is in the
or
position.
Climate Control Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
You can adjust the direction of the
airflow by moving the tab on each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also open or close the vents
with the dial between them.
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
the dashboard, and a temperature
and humidity sensor next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
222
The humidity sensor helps reduce
window fogging and also monitors
and adjusts cabin humidity by
automatically changing the mode to
Defrost.
08/09/04 17:37:14 31TK4600 0228 Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
Models Without navigation system
Models With navigation system
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages 224 through 276 .
Features
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages 277 through 371 .
223
08/09/04 17:37:27 31TK4600 0229 Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Selector Knob
SETUP BUTTON
RETURN
BUTTON
SELECTOR
KNOB
Most audio system functions can be
controlled by standard buttons, bars,
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
224
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to scroll through lists, or to make
selections or adjustments to a list or
menu item on the display. When you
make a selection, push the center of
the selector (ENTER) to go to that
selection.
When the audio system is in XM
satellite radio mode or playing discs,
pushing the selector (ENTER) knob
switches the display between the
normal display and the extended
display. The extended display has
three segments to display the
detailed information.
SETUP Display
To select any setting such as the
clock or sound adjusting, press the
SETUP button. To use any audio
system function, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position. You can select the
item by turning the selector knob.
To go back to the previous display,
press the RETURN button.
Pressing the SETUP button again
will also cancel the setup display
mode.
Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote transmitter and turn the
audio system on with the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II) position, the driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
radio presets and sound level
settings (see page 231 ) are turned to
the respective memorized mode
automatically.
08/09/04 17:37:35 31TK4600 0230 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
DISPLAY
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)
BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
(SOUND) BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
225
08/09/04 17:37:47 31TK4600 0231 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
VOL/
(power/volume) knob or
the AM/FM button. Adjust the
volume by turning the VOL/
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
226
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
228 .
TUNE − Use the selector knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
08/09/04 17:37:58 31TK4600 0232 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
372 .
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
227
Features
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
08/09/04 17:38:07 31TK4600 0233 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the RDS information display
function on.
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name according to
the information provided by the
radio data system (RDS) if the
station has the RDS information
available.
RDS INFO Display
The RDS information display
function shows the name of the RDS
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
228
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS NAME OFF.’’
RDS INFO DISPLAY ON
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
08/09/04 17:38:26 31TK4600 0234 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
RDS CATEGORY
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar to select an RDS category. The
display shows the selected RDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations in the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
RDS Program Search
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar. You
will see the selected RDS category
name blinking while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
CONTINUED
229
Features
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side (− or +) of the CATEGORY
bar to display and select an RDS
category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows:
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Religious music and
religious talk
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk, foreign language, personality,
public, college, and weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
08/07/29 18:11:07 31TK4600 0235 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
RDS Program SCAN
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
230
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function is
off. In this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a RDS name.
08/09/04 17:54:06 31TK4600 0236 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
CENTER − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the center speaker.
Adjusting the Sound
Selector knob adjustable
direction is shown.
Press the SETUP button to display
the sound settings. Turn the selector
knob to select an appropriate setting:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer),
CENTER, Dolby PL (Prologic) II,
and SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Press the selector
(ENTER) knob to enter the setting,
then turn the selector knob to adjust
the setting.
SUBWOOFER is selectable.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
activate when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM radio,
and AUX. When ProLogic II is active,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.
ProLogic ON/OFF settings are
independently controlled for DISC,
XM and AUX sources.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,
‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
CONTINUED
231
Features
FADER is selectable.
SUBW − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the subwoofer speaker.
08/09/04 17:54:17 31TK4600 0237 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
Except SVC adjustment
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
To return to normal play, push the
RETURN or SETUP button after you
stop adjusting a mode.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
232
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons (+ or −)
to adjust the illumination of the audio
system (see page 137 ). The audio
system illuminates when the parking
lights are on, even if the radio is
turned off.
08/09/04 17:54:24 31TK4600 0238 Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
DISPLAY
XM RADIO BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
CONTINUED
233
08/07/29 18:11:41 31TK4600 0239 Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States, and Canada, except Hawaii
and Alaska. XM is a registered
trademark of XM Satellite Radio ,
Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
VOL/
knob.
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the TITLE button
until the mode changes.
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the display changes in
the following sequence: name, title,
and category.
234
You can also change the mode from
the menu items. Press the SETUP
button to display the menu items,
then turn the selector knob to select
MODE/CATEGORY or MODE/
CHANNEL and press the selector
knob (ENTER). Each time you press
and release the selector knob
(ENTER), the display changes
between CHANNEL and
CATEGORY. To enter the setting,
press the TITLE button.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
08/07/29 18:11:48 31TK4600 0240 Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the CATEGORY bar to
select another category.
TUNE − Turn the selector knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
You can also select a channel or
category from the list by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to the list displayed with three
segments, then turn the knob to
select a channel or category. Press
the selector knob (ENTER) to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
235
Features
Channel list is shown.
SCAN − The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
08/07/29 18:12:01 31TK4600 0241 Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.
2. Use the selector knob, or the
CATEGORY bar or SCAN button
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
236
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
button again.
5. Press the
The other XM band will show.
Store the next six channels using
steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
08/07/29 18:12:11 31TK4600 0242 Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
Features
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
SATELLITE
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
GROUND REPEATER
When DPLII is turned on (see page
231 ), sound coming from the rear
speakers may be distorted due to the
compression of the music being
broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this
happens.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
CONTINUED
237
08/07/29 18:12:18 31TK4600 0243 Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
www.xmradio.ca, or call 1-877-4389677. You will need to give them
your radio I.D. number and your
credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
238
08/07/29 18:12:22 31TK4600 0244 Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ will
appear in the display, and you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact
XM Radio.
239
08/09/04 17:54:32 31TK4600 0245 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
MP3/WMA INDICATOR
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
DISC SLOT
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
DISC LOAD BUTTON
CD BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
240
08/07/29 18:12:36 31TK4600 0246 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
A disc compressed in AAC format
cannot be played in this audio
system.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1),
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session.
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
CONTINUED
241
Features
You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display. The disc and track numbers,
and the elapsed time are shown in
the display. You can also select the
displayed information with the
TITLE button (see page 243 ). The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs (uncompressed
or MP3/WMA formats), and
DVD-RWs (uncompressed). When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. The disc, folder and track
numbers are displayed. You can
select up to 255 folders or tracks.
08/07/29 18:12:46 31TK4600 0247 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
242
Loading Discs
Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holds up to six discs.
1. To load more than one disc, press
the LOAD button until you hear a
beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the
display. To load only one disc,
press and release the LOAD
button.
2. The disc number for an empty
position begins blinking.
3. Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this unit.
4. When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.
08/09/04 17:54:47 31TK4600 0248 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text data on a disc, if the disc was
recorded with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to 32 characters of the text data.
If you press and hold the TITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the TITLE button.
243
Features
If you select name off, the text
display is turned off.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
08/07/29 18:13:07 31TK4600 0249 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Use the SKIP bar while a disc is
playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA
mode).
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the
CATEGORY bar to select folders in
the disc and use either side of the
SKIP bar to change files.
To select a different disc, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page 242 ).
244
Folder Selection
Track Selection
Press ENTER.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also
select a folder or track/file from the
list by using the selector knob. Push
the selector knob (ENTER) to
switch the display to the list
displayed with three segments, then
turn the knob to select a folder.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
change the display to the track/file
list, then turn the same knob to
select a track/file. Press the selector
knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the
side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
08/07/29 18:13:13 31TK4600 0250 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set your selection.
MENU ITEMS
Features
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side (+ or −) of the CATEGORY
bar to move to the beginning of the
next folder. Press the + side to skip
to the next folder, and press the −
side to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set the selection.
CONTINUED
245
08/09/04 17:54:59 31TK4600 0251 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
REPEAT ONE TRK − To
continuously replay a track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode), select
REPEAT ONE TRK from the menu
items. You will see REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play to turn it
off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off the repeat feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode
PLAY MODE ITEMS
To cancel the selected repeat,
random, or scan mode, press the
SETUP button to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press the selector
knob (ENTER). When you see
‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTER
again.
246
REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, select REPEAT ONE FLD
from the menu items. You will see
F-REPEAT in the display. The
system continuously replays the
current folder. Select normal play to
turn it off. Selecting a different
folder with the CATEGORY bar also
turns off the repeat feature.
REPEAT DISC − This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To activate disc repeat, select
REPEAT DISC from the menu items.
You will see D-REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play to turn it
off.
In MP3 or WMA mode
RANDOM IN FLD − This feature,
when activated, plays the files within
the current folder in random order,
rather than in the order they are
compressed in MP3 or WMA. To
activate folder random play, select
RANDOM IN FLD from the menu
items. You will see F-RANDOM in
the display. The system will then
select and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random play by selecting normal play,
or you select a different folder with
the CATEGORY bar.
08/09/04 17:55:07 31TK4600 0252 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
SCAN TRK − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 245 ).
In MP3 or WMA mode
SCAN FLD − This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder on the disc in the order
they are recorded. To activate the
folder scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see F-SCAN in the display.
The system will then play the first
file in the main folders for about 10
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then play the following
first files for 10 seconds each. When
it plays a file that you want to
continue listening to, press and hold
the SCAN button.
You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 245 ).
CONTINUED
247
Features
RANDOM IN DISC − This feature
plays the tracks within a disc (the
files in MP3 or WMA mode) in
random order. To activate random
play, select RANDOM IN DISC from
the menu items. You will see
RANDOM in the display. Select
normal play to return to normal play.
08/09/04 17:55:15 31TK4600 0253 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar,
or selecting a different disc (using
the preset buttons) or folder (using
the CATEGORY bar) turns off the
SCAN or F-SCAN feature.
SCAN DISC − This feature, when
activated, samples the first track on
each disc in order (the first file in
the main folder on each disc in MP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until
D-SCAN shows in the display. The
system will then play the first track/
file in the first main folder on the
first disc for about 10 seconds. If you
do nothing, the system will then play
the following first track/file for 10
seconds each. When it plays a track/
file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button again.
When the first track in the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
in the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or selecting a different folder with
the CATEGORY bar also turns off
the scan feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
play.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal play.
You can also select the disc scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 245 ).
248
08/07/29 18:13:41 31TK4600 0254 Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the VOL/
knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the first disc begins
to eject.
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM or
button. Press the AUX button
to switch to an appropriate audio unit
(if it is connected to the auxiliary
input jack or the USB adapter cable).
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the disc changer.
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM Radio).
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
251 .
249
Features
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
08/09/04 17:55:25 31TK4600 0255 Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
Error Message
HEAT ERROR
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 252 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
250
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
MECHA ERROR
CHK DISC LOAD
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
CHECK DISC
EJECT
Cause
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 252). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Servo Error
Disc Error
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 252).
08/07/29 18:13:57 31TK4600 0256 Protecting Your Discs (Models without navigation system)
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Features
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc
changer.
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.
251
08/07/29 18:14:08 31TK4600 0257 Protecting Your Discs (Models without navigation system)
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
252
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
Burrs
With Plastic
Ring
08/07/29 18:14:18 31TK4600 0258 Protecting Your Discs (Models without navigation system)
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dualdisc .
Can Shape
Arrow Shape
253
08/09/04 17:55:32 31TK4600 0259 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
USB INDICATOR
iPod INDICATOR
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CD BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
254
08/07/29 18:14:34 31TK4600 0260 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
The audio system reads and plays
sound files to be playable on the iPod.
The system cannot operate an iPod
as a mass storage device. The
system will only play songs stored on
the iPod with iTunes.
iPods that are compatible with your
audio system are listed below.
Model
iPod 5th and 6th
generations
iPod classic
iPod nano
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod touch
iPhone
Firmware*
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Do not keep the iPod in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
* : Use the latest firmware.
Use only compatible iPods with the
latest firmware. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
CONTINUED
255
Features
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
the USB adapter cable in the console
compartment by using your dock
connector, then press the AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
charged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
08/07/29 18:14:41 31TK4600 0261 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
In AAC format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, the
audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
and then skips to the next file.
Connecting an iPod
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
256
08/07/29 18:14:49 31TK4600 0262 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Sample Display
* : It may take a few minutes for
the Acura logo to display on the
iPod. If the display does not
change, this function is not
supported on your iPod model
or firmware.
OK to disconnect.
When the iPod is connected and the
iPod mode is selected on the audio
display, the USB and iPod indicators
are shown in the display. After
loading, you will see the Acura logo*
on the iPod. That means you can
only operate your iPod using the
vehicle’s audio unit.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
The display shows up to 16
characters (including spaces) of the
selected data. If the text data has
more than 16 characters, you will see
the first 16 characters and the
indicator in the display. Press
and hold the TITLE button until the
next 16 characters are shown.
ipod.
CONTINUED
257
Features
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button the display mode switches
between the album name, the song
name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
08/09/04 17:59:58 31TK4600 0263 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
To Select a File from iPod Menu
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.
258
Push ENTER.
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs, by using
the selector knob. Push the selector
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to an iPod menu, then turn the
selector knob to select a desired list.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the selector knob
to select an item, then press ENTER
to set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files
on the selected list are played.
08/07/29 18:15:06 31TK4600 0264 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display and
pressing the SETUP button cancels
this setting mode.
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:
MENU ITEMS
Turn the selector knob to select a
play mode: normal play, shuffle off,
shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off,
or repeat one track, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
PLAY MODE ITEMS
Features
You can select any type of repeat and
shuffle mode by using the SETUP
button and the selector knob. Press
the SETUP button to display the
menu items, then turn the selector
knob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE.’’ Press
ENTER to set the selection.
To cancel the selected mode, press
the SETUP button and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
ENTER again.
CONTINUED
259
08/07/29 18:15:15 31TK4600 0265 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
SHUFFLE OFF − This feature
turns off either of the shuffle modes
(SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE
ALBUM).
SHUFFLE ALL − This feature
plays all available files in a selected
list (playlists, artists, albums or
songs) in random order.
You will see SHUFFLE in the display.
Select the normal play mode or
SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this
feature.
REPEAT OFF − This feature turns
off the repeat mode.
SHUFFLE ALBUM − This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums
or songs) in random order. The files
in each album are played in the
recorded order. You will see ALB
SHUF in the display.
Select the normal play mode or
SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this
feature.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or turning the selector knob changes
the file while keeping the repeat
feature.
REPEAT ONE TRK − This
feature continuously plays a file. You
will see REPEAT in the display.
Select normal play or REPEAT OFF
to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
or turning the selector knob changes
a file while keeping the shuffle
function.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
260
08/07/29 18:15:22 31TK4600 0266 Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To play the radio, press the AM/FM,
or
button. Press the CD button
to switch to the disc mode (if a disc
is loaded). Press the AUX button to
switch the audio mode between the
Bluetooth audio and iPod.
iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 262 .
Features
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
* : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions.
On some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
261
08/07/29 18:15:26 31TK4600 0267 iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
262
Error Message
Solution
FILE ERROR
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There
is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
MEDIA ERROR
08/09/04 18:00:06 31TK4600 0268 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
FILE TYPE INDICATOR
USB INDICATOR
Features
VOL/
(VOLUME/POWER) KNOB
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
CD BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
263
08/07/29 18:15:39 31TK4600 0269 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the disc player. To
play a USB flash memory device,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment, then
press the AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC* formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.
* : Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 Mbyte or
higher. Some digital audio players
may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
264
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a
card reader or hard drive as the
device or your files may be
damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
08/07/29 18:15:56 31TK4600 0270 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/144/160/VBR kbps
(MPEG2)
−Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
−Partition: Top partition only
−Maximum layers: 8
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
−Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
8−320 kbps
−Supported standards:
MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
−Partition: Top partition only
−Maximum layers: 8
Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or
AAC format, a file with unsupported
version cannot be played. If the
system finds it, the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
CONTINUED
265
Features
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
48−320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
−Supported standards:
WMA version 7/8/9
−Partition: Top partition only
−Maximum layers: 8
08/07/29 18:16:03 31TK4600 0271 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display mode shows you
in sequence, the folder name, the file
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Pull out the USB connector from
the holder.
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.
266
The display shows up to 16
characters (including spaces) of the
selected data. If the text data has
more than 16 characters, you will see
the first 16 characters and the
indicator in the display. Press
and hold the TITLE button until the
next 16 characters are shown.
08/07/29 18:16:12 31TK4600 0272 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.
To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists
Folder Selection
Features
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
Press ENTER.
Track Selection
You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the selector
knob. Push the selector knob
(ENTER) to switch the display to the
folder list, then turn the selector
knob to select a folder. Press
ENTER to change the display to the
file list, then turn the same knob to
select a file. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
267
08/09/04 18:00:30 31TK4600 0273 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display and
pressing the SETUP button cancels
this setting mode.
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
MENU ITEMS
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set the selection.
268
Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set your selection.
To cancel the selected mode, press
the SETUP button and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
ENTER again.
08/09/04 18:00:40 31TK4600 0274 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
PLAY MODE ITEMS
REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature
replays all the files on the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
Select normal play to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the
CATEGORY bar also turns off this
feature.
REPEAT ONE TRK − This
feature continuously plays a file.
Select normal play to turn it off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off this feature.
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 268 ).
RANDOM IN DISC − This feature
plays all the files in random order.
You will see RANDOM in the display.
Select normal play to turn it off.
CONTINUED
269
Features
RANDOM IN FLD − This feature
plays the files in the selected folder
in random order. You will see
F-RANDOM in the display. Select
normal play to turn it off.
SCAN TRK − This function
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, press
and release the SCAN button. You
will see SCAN in the display. You will
get a 10 second sampling of each file
in the folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of the scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
08/07/29 18:16:36 31TK4600 0275 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
SCAN FLD − This function
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press and release the SCAN button
repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of the first file in each
folder. Press and hold the SCAN
button to get out of the folder scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 268 ).
Select normal play to turn either
scan feature off. Pressing either side
of the CATEGORY or SKIP bar also
turns off the feature.
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To change modes, press the AM/
FM or XM button. Press the CD
button to switch to the disc mode (if
a disc is loaded). Press the AUX
button to switch the audio mode
between the USB or Bluetooth
audio.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.
270
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 271 .
08/07/29 18:16:40 31TK4600 0276 USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message
FILE ERROR
MEDIA ERROR
Solution
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash
memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been
damaged.
Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
Features
271
08/09/04 18:00:46 31TK4600 0277 Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SETUP BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
272
08/09/04 18:00:58 31TK4600 0278 Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by
calling the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
1-888-9-ACURA-9.
NOTE: In some states, it may be
illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
After a device is linked, press the
TITLE button to confirm the device
name. The name of the device will
appear on the audio display.
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be delay
before the system begins to play.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to the HFL.
Press the AUX button* with the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. The audio
display shows the Bluetooth Audio
message and mark. Until the phone
is recognized, you will see ‘‘NO
CONNECT’’ on the display. This
message will go off when the phone
is recognized, then the system
begins to play.
*: If an iPod, USB flash memory
device, or audio unit connected
to the auxiliary input jack was
selected at the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB, or AUX in
the audio display. Push the AUX
button again to play audio files
from your Bluetooth Audio
phone.
CONTINUED
273
Features
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on Bluetooth Audio
Compatible phones that are paired
and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 392 ).
08/09/04 18:01:10 31TK4600 0279 Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’
message.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
To skip a file
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
To pause or resume a file
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily. Press the
SETUP button to display the audio
settings.
Turn the selector to select
RESUME/PAUSE mode, then press
ENTER to set your selection. Repeat
to resume play.
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
274
08/07/29 18:17:14 31TK4600 0280 Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To change sound settings
To switch to HFL mode
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press
the Talk button on the steering
wheel. The display switches to the
HFL mode (see page 394 ).
Press the SETUP button to display
the audio settings. Turn the selector
to select a desired sound mode, then
press ENTER to set your selection.
Turn the selector to your liking (see
page 231 for more sound setting
information).
If you receive a call while the system
is in the pause mode, the mode will
be canceled and Bluetooth Audio
will continue to play.
Select any other audio mode by
pressing a button: AM/FM,
or
CD (if a disc is loaded), on the audio
control panel, or press the mode
button on the steering wheel to
select another audio mode. If an iPod
or USB flash memory device is
connected to the USB adapter cable,
or audio unit is connected to AUX
jack, pressing the AUX button also
changes the mode.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
CONTINUED
275
Features
After ending the call, press the HFL
Back button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
To turn off the Bluetooth Audio
mode
08/07/29 18:17:18 31TK4600 0281 Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
276
08/07/29 18:17:26 31TK4600 0282 Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a dial and a selector.
Voice Control System
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
Navigation section in your quick
start guide for an overview of this
system, and the navigation system
manual for complete details.
DIAL
ENTER
The dial turns left and right. Use it to
make selections or adjustments to a
list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.
277
Features
SELECTOR
Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote and turn the audio
system on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1
or Driver 2) is detected, and the
radio presets and sound level
settings (see page 288 ) are turned to
the respective memorized mode
automatically.
08/07/29 18:17:33 31TK4600 0283 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
VOL/
KNOB
(VOLUME/POWER)
CENTER DISPLAY
(SOUND) BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
TUNE BAR
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/
AUTO SELECT) BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
278
08/07/29 18:17:42 31TK4600 0284 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio
STEREO INDICATOR
BAND
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
center display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
preset buttons, and auto select.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
282 .
CONTINUED
279
Features
The power mode must be in
ACCESSORY or ON. Press the
AUDIO button to view the audio
control display. Turn the system on
by pressing the VOL/
knob or
the AM/FM button. Adjust the
volume by turning the
VOL/
knob.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
08/07/29 18:17:49 31TK4600 0285 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
interface selector, then push the
interface selector up to go back.
SCAN
SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar, then release
it.
TUNE
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the
side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, or the
side to tune to a lower
frequency. To tune with the
interface dial, push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to select Tune. Then press
ENTER on the interface selector,
and turn the interface dial to the
desired frequency. To exit the
TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
280
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN side of
the SCAN A.SEL bar, then release it.
To scan with the interface dial, push
the interface selector down, and turn
the interface dial to select Scan, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
08/07/29 18:17:57 31TK4600 0286 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.
To store a preset memory location:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
3. Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
A.SEL INDICATOR
Features
You will see SCAN on the screen.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the bar again.
A.SEL
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find strong signal stations in the local
area.
2. Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or
RDS function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
CONTINUED
281
08/07/29 18:18:05 31TK4600 0287 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select ON, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
A.SEL on the center display and the
audio control display (if selected),
and the system goes into auto select
mode for several seconds.
You can also press the A.SEL side of
the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
A.SEL on the center display or the
screen, and the system goes into
auto select mode for several seconds.
The system stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons (icons).
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button (icon).
282
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
To cancel auto select, select A.Sel on
the audio menu again and turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL OFF,
or press the A.SEL side of the bar
again. This restores the presets you
originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
372 .
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name according to
the information provided by the
radio data system (RDS) if the
station has the RDS information
available.
RDS INFO Display
The RDS INFO display function
shows the name of the station you
are listening to. With the audio
system on and the FM band selected,
you can turn this function on or off.
08/07/29 18:18:13 31TK4600 0288 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency.
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
RDS INFO MESSAGE
To switch the RDS INFO display
function on and off, press and
release the TITLE button. With the
system on, you will see the ‘‘RDS
INFO ON’’ message on the center
display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
NOTE: If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
audio screen will always display the
RDS information.
Features
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘RDS INFO
OFF.’’
RDS SEARCH
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
display the radio information on the
screen. Push down the interface
selector, then turn the interface dial
to select RDS search. Press ENTER
to set your selection. The principal
RDS categories are shown as
follows:
CONTINUED
283
08/07/29 18:18:25 31TK4600 0289 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
ALL: All RDS category stations
COUNTRY: Country music.
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
JAZZ: Jazz
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
CLASSIC: Classical music
RELIGION: Religious music and
religious talk
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk, foreign language, personality,
public, college, and weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
284
RDS CATEGORY
RDS CATEGORY
Turn the interface dial to select an
RDS category. You can use the
search or scan function to find radio
stations on the selected RDS
category by pressing the interface
selector to the left or the right. Press
ENTER to set your selection. If you
do nothing while the RDS category is
selected, the selected category is
canceled.
You can also select an RDS category
with the CATEGORY bar. Press
either side (+ or −) of the
CATEGORY bar to display an RDS
category in the center display. Select
a category by pressing either side of
the bar.
08/07/29 18:18:33 31TK4600 0290 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category Search
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds on the center display, then
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds on the navigation screen
and the system will go back to the
last selected station.
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or right to select SEEK up,
SEEK down, or SCAN in the upper
right corner of the screen. When you
press and release ENTER to select
the RDS category, RDS category
search (SEEK up/down) starts.
To activate RDS category search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the interface selector down,
and turn the interface dial to select
RDS search. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. The screen shows
you the RDS category list.
CONTINUED
285
Features
This function searches up and down
for strong signal frequencies that
carries the selected RDS category
information. This can help you to
find a station in your favorite
category. To activate it, press and
release either side (
or
) of
the SKIP bar. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
searching it.
08/07/29 18:18:39 31TK4600 0291 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category SCAN
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category one by one.
To activate it, press and release the
SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar.
You will see SCAN in the center
display. The system will scan for a
station with a strong signal in the
selected RDS category. You will also
see the selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
scanning it. When the system finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
286
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds on the center display, then
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds on the navigation screen
and the system will go back to the
last selected station.
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.
To activate RDS category scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
interface selector down, and turn the
interface dial to select RDS search
on the audio menu. Press ENTER on
the interface selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
08/09/04 18:01:19 31TK4600 0292 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
TEXT INDICATOR
If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.
Features
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or the right to select SCAN.
When you press and release ENTER
to select the RDS category, RDS
program SCAN starts.
Radio Text Display
This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.
READ RADIO TEXT
To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to select Read Radio Text. Press
ENTER on the interface selector to
enter the setting.
CONTINUED
287
08/07/29 18:18:55 31TK4600 0293 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and
BALANCE are each adjustable. You
can also adjust the strength of the
sound coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
These adjustments can be made with
the
(Sound) button or the
interface dial.
The display shows up to 64
characters on the selected RDS
station.
SOUND SETUP
To adjust the sound, press the
AUDIO button, push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to Sound Setup. Then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Select the mode you want to adjust
by turning the interface dial.
288
08/07/29 18:19:06 31TK4600 0294 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
The system will return to the audio
playing mode in the center display
about 10 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
You can also adjust the sound by
pushing the
(Sound) button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the center display as you push the
button.
Turn the VOL/
knob or
interface knob to adjust the setting
to your liking. You can check the
level on the navigation screen or on
the center display. When the level
reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’
in the center display.
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the display. Turn the
interface dial or VOL/
knob to
the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector.
If the fader adjustment is set to F9
(maximum front level), the
subwoofer is turned off.
CONTINUED
289
Features
If you do not make an adjustment
within 10 seconds, you will need to
select the mode again.
FADER/BALANCE − These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface dial or VOL/
knob
to the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector. To equalize the
fader or balance, turn the interface
dial or VOL/
knob until the
marks on the sound grid come to the
center of the adjustment bar.
08/07/29 18:19:12 31TK4600 0295 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
CENTER − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the center speaker.
SUBWOOFER − To adjust the
strength of the sound from the
subwoofer speaker, select it and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
the desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector.
290
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: OFF,
LOW, MID, and HIGH. The default
setting is MID. To change the SVC
mode, select SVC, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The current setting is shown on the
screen. Turn the interface dial to the
desired level, and enter your
selection by pressing ENTER on the
interface selector. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose
high.
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
activate when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3, WMA, AAC), XM
radio, AUX (USB, iPod , AUX,
Bluetooth Audio), and HDD Audio.
When ProLogic II is available, ‘‘PL
II’’ is shown in the audio display.
When ProLogic II is not available in
the selected audio source, ‘‘DPL2 N/
A’’ is shown on the center display.
ProLogic ON/OFF settings are
independently controlled for DISC,
XM, HDD Audio, and AUX sources.
08/07/29 18:19:17 31TK4600 0296 Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To set this feature on or off, select
Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Rotate the
interface dial to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER.
Features
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,
‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
NOTE: In some audio playing modes
(XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, the
music coming from the rear
speakers may sound distorted. This
is due to compression of the music,
and it does not indicate a problem
with the setting.
291
08/07/29 18:19:23 31TK4600 0297 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
VOL/
KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
(VOLUME/POWER)
CENTER DISPLAY
(SOUND) BUTTON
XM RADIO BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
TUNE BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/
AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
292
08/07/29 18:19:31 31TK4600 0298 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio , Inc.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
Each time you push the interface
selector up, the band will change to
XM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIO
button to display XM information on
the screen. You can operate the XM
radio system with the interface dial.
To listen to XM radio, set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or ON. Push
the
button to select the XM
radio. The last channel you listened
to will show in the audio screen (if
selected) and the center display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
VOL/
knob.
CONTINUED
293
Features
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
also allows you to view channel and
category selections in the audio
display.
Operating the XM Radio
08/09/04 18:01:29 31TK4600 0299 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
MODE − To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
push the interface selector down to
display AUDIO MENU, then turn
the interface dial to select Mode, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select CH
or CAT, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. Move the
interface selector up to go back.
You can also switch the mode by
pressing the TITLE button for 3
seconds.
In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
294
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
NAME (artist name), TITLE (music
title), and CHANNEL NAME
(channel name).
On the screen, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
TUNE − Press either side of the
TUNE bar to change channel
selections. Press the
side of the
bar for higher numbered channels
and the
side for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to select AUDIO MENU,
then turn the interface dial to choose
Tune and press ENTER on the
interface selector. Turn the interface
dial to the appropriate direction. In
the category mode, you can only
select channels within that category.
CHANNEL LIST − Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel List and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface dial to select a channel,
then press ENTER to set your
selection.
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the bar to select
another category.
08/07/29 18:19:49 31TK4600 0300 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
SCAN side of the bar to cancel.
CHANNEL SCAN − This function
samples all channels. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
SCAN, press the SCAN side of the
SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
SCAN on the screen and center
display.
CATEGORY SCAN − This
function samples the stations in the
selected category. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Category Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the
display.
CONTINUED
295
08/07/29 18:25:16 31TK4600 0301 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
2. Use the tune, list, or scan function
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
button or scroll
5. Press the
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
296
Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘CHECK ANTENNA’’ − There is
a problem with the XM antenna.
Please consult your dealer.
08/07/29 18:25:26 31TK4600 0302 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles
to the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Features
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
GROUND REPEATER
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
CONTINUED
297
08/07/29 18:25:37 31TK4600 0303 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Note Function
U.S. models only
NOTE ICON
This function stores the sound
content played on the selected XM
satellite radio station with the
channel, category, name, and title
information.
To activate this function, press and
hold the
button for about 2
seconds while a song or passage
which you want to store is playing.
You can record for up to 10 seconds.
To stop recording, press the AM/
FM button or
button.
Once you store the recorded sound
file, you can replay it and confirm the
information. The system can store
up to 30 sound files. If you continue
to store more files, the oldest one
will be deleted each time you add
new file.
298
SOUND FILE
To replay and see the stored file,
press the AUDIO button to select
the audio display on the navigation
screen.
Push down the interface selector
to display the audio menu. Turn
the interface dial to select Note,
then press ENTER.
RECORDED DATE
Turn the selector dial to select a
sound file, then press ENTER. The
display shows the category, name
and title information of the selected
file.
08/07/29 18:25:44 31TK4600 0304 Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the power mode
in ACCESSORY or ON, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
www.xmradio.ca, or call 1-877-4389677. You will need to give them
your radio I.D. number and your
credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press and release
the
side of the TUNE bar until
‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D.
will appear in the display.
After you have registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, CAT
(category) or CH (channel) will
appear in the center display, and
you’ll be able to listen to XM Radio
broadcasts. XM Radio will continue
to send an activation signal to your
vehicle for at least 12 hours from the
activation request. If the service has
not been activated after 36 hours,
contact XM Radio.
299
Features
To delete all files, push the interface
selector to the left to select
‘‘DELETE ALL,’’ then press ENTER
on the interface selector. To delete
one file, select the file you want to
delete and push the interface
selector to the right, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
08/07/29 18:25:51 31TK4600 0305 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
DISC SLOT
VOL/
KNOB
EJECT BUTTON
(VOLUME/POWER)
CENTER DISPLAY
DISC BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/
AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
300
08/07/29 18:26:01 31TK4600 0306 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
internal disc player. To operate the
disc player, the power mode must be
in the ACCESSORY or ON.
The CD player can play these disc
formats:
CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT)
CD-R/CD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC)
DVD-A
DVD-R/DVD-RW (MP3, WMA,
AAC)
The disc player can also play MP3,
WMA, or AAC format that saved on
CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (see page
306).
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or AAC disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio
system skips to the next file.
DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
verification standards may not be
playable.
Video CDs and DVD-V format discs
will not work in this unit.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
CONTINUED
301
Features
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.
08/07/29 18:26:08 31TK4600 0307 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
It is possible to select up to 999 files
for inclusion in CD-Rs and CD-RWs,
and up to 3,500 files for inclusion in
DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
302
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered
trademarks and the DTS logos and
Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
To Load a Disc
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
313 .
08/07/29 18:26:15 31TK4600 0308 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
Select the disc player by pressing the
DISC button. The system will begin
playing the last selected track in the
disc. You will see the current track
position highlighted.
To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release the
side of the skip bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press the
side
again to skip to the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold either side of the skip bar.
When you insert a CD for the first
time, the system automatically starts
recording to the hard disc. For
information on recording from music
CDs, see PlayingHDDAudio.
303
Features
Title information will be displayed by
a list when the information is found
in the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on the
built-in hard disk drive. When you
play a CD recorded with text data,
you will see the genre, artist name,
album and track name on the screen.
When you play MP3/WMA/AAC
discs, you will see the genre, artist
name, album name and track name
on the screen. If the disc was not
recorded with this information, it will
not be displayed.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the center display changes
from artist name to album name, to
track name and then to normal
display that shows the track number
and the elapsed time. When playing
a disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, the
display mode changes from folder
name, to file name, to artist tag, to
album tag, to track tag, and then to
normal display.
08/07/29 18:26:23 31TK4600 0309 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Choose a Track
Track Repeat
TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT OFF ICON
TRACK LIST
You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. If there are no track
names, you will see ‘‘No Title’’
displayed. Turn the interface dial to
select the desired track, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
304
TRACK REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select Repeat icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
08/07/29 18:26:32 31TK4600 0310 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Random Play
TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR
RANDOM OFF ICON
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Track Scan
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This feature plays the tracks within a
disc in random order. When playing
MP3, WMA or AAC format discs, all
the tracks within the disc are played
in random order, regardless of the
configuration of the folder.
Push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Random on
the AUDIO MENU, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
SCAN ICON
The scan function samples all tracks
on the disc in the order they are
recorded on the disc.
To activate scan, press the SCAN
side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, or
push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Scan on the
AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
305
08/07/29 18:26:43 31TK4600 0311 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
Scan icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track on the
disc. When you return to disc mode,
the disc will begin playing from
where it left off.
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN button again, or turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The system begins to play
the last track sampled.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of disc mode,
press the AM/FM button, the
button, or the HDD/AUX
button. To return to disc mode, press
the DISC button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the VOL/
knob or the engine start/stop
button, the disc will stay in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
the disc will begin playing where it
left off.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to turn
the power mode off, see page 178 .
306
Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC Disc
This audio system plays CD-ROM,
CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, and
DVD-R/RW compressed in MP3,
WMA, or AAC formats. You can
select up to 255 folders or tracks.
Disc
CD-ROM
CD-R
CD-RW
DVD-ROM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Maximum
folders*
Maximum
Files
Maximum
layers*
255
999
8
255
3500
8
*: Including Root folder
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
8/11.025/12 kHz (MPEG2.5)
08/07/29 18:26:54 31TK4600 0312 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/16/22.05/32/44.1/48
kHz
−Bitrate:
5/6/8/10/12/16/20/22/32/48/
64/80/96/128/160/192/256/
320 kbps
−Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers:
255 layers
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
−Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
8/16/20/24/28/32/40/48/56/64/
80/96/112/128/160/192/224/
256/320 kbps
−Compatible with multi-session.
−Maximum layers:
255 layers
Changing the Folders
While playing an MP3/WMA/AAC
disc, you can select a folder within
the disc by pressing either side of
the category bar. Each time you
press either side of the bar, the
folder title and its first file’s
information appear on the center
display and on the navigation screen
in hierarchical order of the folders
which contain files within the disc.
NOTE:
Combining a low sampling frequency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc,
use the disc controls previously
described, along with the following
information.
CONTINUED
307
Features
−Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/144/160 kbps
(MPEG2.5)
−Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session.
−Maximum layers:
255 layers
08/07/29 18:27:05 31TK4600 0313 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Repeat
Changing and Selecting the Folders/
Files
FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT OFF ICON
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
FOLDER LIST
Using the interface selector, you can
see the list of all the folders within a
disc. While playing an MP3/WMA/
AAC disc, push the interface selector
up. The folder list in the currently
playing disc will appear on the screen.
If the root folder has some additional
folders in the lower layer, they will
be listed on the screen.
308
TRACK LIST
Select a desired folder by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
The display returns to normal play,
and the first track in the selected
folder begins to play.
To change a file, turn the interface
dial to select a desired file, then
press ENTER.
This feature, when activated, replays
all files on the selected folder in the
order they are compressed. To
activate folder repeat play, push the
interface selector down while playing
a disc. Turn the interface dial to
select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the folder repeat icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
08/07/29 18:27:11 31TK4600 0314 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Folder Random
FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Features
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
This feature, when activated, plays
all files in the current folder in
random order. To activate folder
random play, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Random on the AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the folder random icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
309
08/07/29 18:27:17 31TK4600 0315 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
sample the remaining files.
File Scan
SCAN OFF ICON
FILE SCAN ICON
FOLDER SCAN ICON
This feature samples all files in the
selected folder in the order they are
stored. To activate this feature, press
the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL
bar. You can also select the SCAN
icon with the interface dial. Push the
selector down, turn the dial to select
Scan on the AUDIO MENU, then
press ENTER. Turn the dial to select
the scan icon, then press ENTER.
The system begins to play a file for
about 10 seconds, and continues to
310
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN side of the bar again, or select
OFF icon by turning the dial, then
press ENTER.
Folder Scan
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file of each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/
A.SEL bar. Or, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select Scan
on the AUDIO MENU, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
folder scan icon, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
08/09/04 18:07:46 31TK4600 0316 Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file of the last folder, the system
plays normally.
Playing a DVD-A Disc
Use the disc controls previously
described.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds. The disc starts
playing automatically.
Features
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The last track sampled
begins to play.
Removing Discs from the Disc
Player
To remove the disc, press the eject
(
) button.
NOTE:
When playing MP3, WMA or AAC
format disc, each time you press the
SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar,
the system changes in the following
sequence: Scan → Scan first track in
folder → OFF → Scan.
311
08/07/29 18:27:32 31TK4600 0317 Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
center display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a disc,
press the eject button. After ejecting
the disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 314 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
312
Error
Message
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
MECH ERROR
CHECK DISC
CHECK DISC
LOAD
UNPLAYABLE
FILE
HEAT ERROR
Cause
Servo Error
Mechanical Error
Solution
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 314 ). Insert the disc again. If the
code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
FOUCS Error
Disc violates copyright
Disc not supported
Load Error
Track/File format not
supported
High Temperature
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
08/07/29 18:27:43 31TK4600 0318 Protecting Your Discs (Models with navigation system)
General Information
When using CD-R, CD-RW,
DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, use
only high quality discs labeled for
audio use.
When using DVD-R/RW discs,
they should meet DVD verification
standards.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Features
When recording a CD-R, CD-RW,
DVD-R or DVD-RW the recording
must be closed for it to be used by
the disc player.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
313
08/07/29 18:27:54 31TK4600 0319 Protecting Your Discs (Models with navigation system)
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
314
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
Burrs
With Plastic
Ring
08/07/29 18:28:05 31TK4600 0320 Protecting Your Discs (Models with navigation system)
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or
DVD-RW may not play due to the
recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dualdisc .
Can Shape
Arrow Shape
315
08/07/29 18:28:11 31TK4600 0321 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
VOL/
KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
(VOLUME/POWER)
CENTER DISPLAY
HDD/AUX BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/
AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
316
08/07/29 18:28:19 31TK4600 0322 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
NOTE:
Only recordings from a standard
CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo
PCM digital sound data) to HDD
are supported.
Digital music files, such as MP3,
WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-R
and USB flash memory devices
cannot be copied to HDD.
Likewise, digital music files
recorded to HDD cannot be copied
to CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.
Music data recorded on HDD can
only be used for personal
enjoyment.
Data is recorded using ultraefficient compression technology,
therefore, sound quality may vary
slightly from the original.
Title information will be displayed
when the information is found in
the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on
the built-in hard disk drive. See
page 342 .
Recording function from following
media is not supported.
−CD-DA which prohibits the copy
by SCMS
−CD-DA with copy control
−SACD (Super Audio CD)
−DTS-CD
−DVD-A
−CD-R/RW
−DVD-R/RW
−Copy controlled CDs (Playback
cannot be guaranteed)
−DTS-CDs (Only enabled for
playback)
If the HDD is ever replaced, all data
will be lost and stored music will not
be recovered.
317
Features
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
function can record tracks from
music CDs to the navigation system’s
hard disc. This function also allows
for various playing methods, such as
playing recorded tracks on an artistby-artist or genre-by-genre basis. For
example, you can play the tracks that
you want to listen to in any order
that you like for each playlist.
08/09/04 18:08:01 31TK4600 0323 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Playlists
Playlists are track lists in a certain
playback group.
Original Playlist
This playlist is automatically
generated when the music CD is
recorded. The maximum number
of original playlists that can be
stored to the HDD is 999, with 99
songs on each playlist. Each album
name on the music CD is counted
as a playlist.
318
User Playlist
The HDD has six playlist folders
for user customizing. Each playlist
can be edited by the user, and will
store up to 999 songs. For more
information of how to edit the user
playlist, see page 329 .
Track Search Methods
Songs that have been recorded on
the HDD are categorized in groups
for easy searching.
There are six categories:
Album record date: Album titles are
arranged by date of recording.
Album: Album names are arranged
in alphabetical order.
Artist: Artist names are arranged in
alphabetical order.
Genre: Songs are arranged by genre.
Playlist: Any of six playlists that are
arranged by the user
Track: Track titles are arranged in
alphabetical order.
For more information of how to
search a music, see page 325 .
08/07/29 18:28:40 31TK4600 0324 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
REC DONE ICON
NOTE:
Please note that there will be no
compensation offered in the case
of unsuccessful recording of audio
data or the loss of audio data due
to any cause whatsoever.
During recording, operation of this
product may be slower.
REC READY ICON
REC ICON
The icons show the recording
conditions for each track:
Rec icon: Now recording
Rec ready icon: Next to be recorded
Rec done icon: Recording finished
If you stop the engine or the
power system is turned off while
recording a CD, there may be
pauses between songs when you
play back from the HDD.
Tracks from music CDs are
recorded at four times the
playback speed. You can listen to
tracks as they are being recorded.
Skip up/down, forward/rewind,
repeat, random and scan functions
are not available during recording.
CONTINUED
319
Features
Recording a Music CD to HDD
Audio
If you play a music CD that has not
yet been recorded on the HDD, the
system will automatically begin
recording to the HDD once the disc
is loaded. To turn this feature off,
see page 320 .
08/07/29 18:28:49 31TK4600 0325 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
You can listen to tracks from other
playlists that have already been
recorded while recording. Press
the HDD/AUX button and switch
over to HDD Audio.
To Cancel Recording a Music CD
to HDD
In order to suspend recording, push
the interface selector down, select
Cancel Rec to HDD, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Changing the Recording Settings
Recording All of the Tracks on a
Music CD Manually
With the factory settings, all of the
songs on a music CD are
automatically recorded.
Recording settings cannot be
changed during recording.
If the number of songs in the
playlist exceeds 999, the oldest
song will be overwritten each time
you add a new song.
320
HDD SETUP
To change the setting to manual
mode, push the interface selector
down on the HDD screen. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup
and press ENTER. Turn the
interface dial to select Ripping, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
08/07/29 18:28:58 31TK4600 0326 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Recording All of the Tracks on a
Music CD Automatically
Turn the interface selector to select
Ripping, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
RIPPING ICON
Turn the dial to select Ripping and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select
MANUAL and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
REC TO HDD ICON
To record the music CD, push the
HDD/AUX button, then push the
interface selector down to display
the audio menu. Turn the interface
dial to select Rec to HDD, and then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select
AUTO, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
321
Features
To change the setting to
automatically record all of the tracks
on a music CD, move the interface
selector down on the HDD Audio
screen. Turn the interface dial to
select HDD Setup, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
08/07/29 18:29:06 31TK4600 0327 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Playing Tracks on HDD
To play tracks on HDD, push the
HDD/AUX button until the HDD
Audio screen appears. Playback will
start automatically with the track
previously selected.
Playing the Selected Track
To select tracks, press on the
Category bar or the Skip bar.
Category Bar
The next playlist is selected.
+
If you press + during the last
playlist, the first playlist is selected.
The previous playlist is selected.
If you press − during the first
−
playlist, the last playlist is selected.
Skip Bar
Returns to the beginning of the
song that is being played.
Otherwise, the previous track is
selected. If you press this bar
during the first song, the last song
is selected.
The next song is selected. If you
press this bar during the last song,
the first song is selected.
322
Fast Forwarding and Rewinding
To fast forward, press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar. To
rewind, press and hold the
side
of the SKIP bar.
08/07/29 18:29:16 31TK4600 0328 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Repeat Playback
REPEAT OFF ICON
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Random Playback
RANDOM OFF ICON
Features
REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the repeat icon, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
RANDOM ICON
This function plays the tracks on the
HDD in random order. To activate
random play, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select
Random on the HDD AUDIO MENU.
Press ENTER on the interface
selector.
CONTINUED
323
08/07/29 18:29:24 31TK4600 0329 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
scan icon. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track on the
HDD.
Scan Playback
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon.
Press ENTER on the interface
selector to play the last track
sampled.
SCAN OFF ICON
SCAN ICON
This function samples all the tracks
on the HDD in the order that they
were recorded.
To activate scan, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select Scan
on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
324
08/07/29 18:29:34 31TK4600 0330 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching the Music
While playing music in the HDD
playback screen, push the interface
selector up to select MUSIC
SEARCH. You can search a track by
album, artist, track, playlist, genre,
or album record date, or you can
shuffle all tracks.
Searching Music by Album
ALPHABET TAG
Features
Push the selector down.
SHUFFLE ALL TRACKS
Shuffles the playback of all tracks
that have been recorded on HDD.
To shuffle all tracks, push the
interface selector up to display the
Search music by screen, and then
push the interface selector down.
Shuffled playback begins.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Album. Press ENTER on the
selector, and the album list will be
displayed in alphabetical order.
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
CONTINUED
325
08/07/29 18:29:41 31TK4600 0331 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
Searching Music by Artist
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
The first track on the selected artist
begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Artist. Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the artist list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
Turn the interface dial to select the
artist you want to listen to, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
326
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
08/07/29 18:29:50 31TK4600 0332 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Track
Turn the interface dial to select a
track you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Searching Music by Playlists
Features
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
The selected track begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Track. Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the track list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Playlist. Press ENTER on the
interface selector then the playlist
will be displayed.
CONTINUED
327
08/07/29 18:29:56 31TK4600 0333 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
playlist you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Searching Music by Genre
The first track on the selected
playlist begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Genre. Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the genre list
will be displayed.
Turn the interface dial to select the
genre you want to listen to, and then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
328
The first track on the selected genre
begins to play.
08/07/29 18:30:04 31TK4600 0334 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Album
Record Date
RECORDED DATE
Customizing Original/User
Playlist
The HDD has two types of the
playlists: original playlist and user
playlist. On the original playlist, the
music CD is recorded automatically
when it is played. In addition, you
can create up to six user playlists on
the HDD. In each playlist, you can
store a desired music data from the
original playlists or music CDs.
After storing the data, you can
change some items: order of tracks
on the user playlist, name of the
playlist, track title, artist name, and
music genre. You can also add a
track to the playlist, and delete the
track or the album from the playlist.
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
329
Features
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Album Record Date. Press ENTER
on the interface selector. The album
list will be displayed.
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
08/07/29 18:30:12 31TK4600 0335 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Playlist, then press ENTER
on the interface selector.
Changing the Order of Tracks
Within the User Playlist
5. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Order, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
6. Turn the interface dial to select
the track to be moved, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
1. On the HDD audio screen, push
up the interface selector to select
MUSIC SEARCH. Select Playlist
by turning the interface dial, then
press ENTER.
330
2. Turn the interface dial to select
the playlist, then press ENTER.
3. Push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU for
the playlist.
08/07/29 18:30:21 31TK4600 0336 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Name of the
Original Playlist or User Playlist
To change user playlist name
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Playlist (or Edit Album to edit
Original Playlist), then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To change original playlist name
7. Turn the interface dial to select
where the track is to be moved,
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
8. Push the interface selector down
to return to the Playback screen of
the User Playlist.
4. On the Edit Album Name screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist name, or a desired
album to change the original
playlist name (album name). Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 325 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
CONTINUED
331
Features
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Playlist Name (or Edit Album
Name to edit Original Playlist),
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
08/07/29 18:30:31 31TK4600 0337 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
6. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
Changing the Track Titles
7. The confirmation screen is
displayed. Confirm that the new
name is correct, and then push the
interface selector down to select
OK. You will be returned to the
Edit Album or Edit Playlist screen
for the Original Playlist or User
Playlist.
OPTIONS ICON
5. On the Enter an album name
screen, input the new Original
Playlist name or User Playlist
name.
Select a letter by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
8. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
1. Select a desired playlist, then turn
the interface dial to select the
track of which you want to change
the name, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. Refer to the
Music Search function on page
325 for how to select a playlist.
2. The OPTIONS icon will appear in
the selected track. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
332
08/07/29 18:30:41 31TK4600 0338 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. On the Edit Track Name screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Edit Track, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
6. Input the new track name on the
Enter a track name screen.
7. After inputting the name, push the
selector down to select OK.
3. The track options box is displayed.
Select Edit Track Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
4. On the Edit Track screen, turn the
interface dial and select Edit
Track Name, then press ENTER
on the interface selector.
8. The confirmation screen is
displayed. Confirm that the new
track name is correct, and then
push the interface selector down
to select OK. You will be returned
to the Edit screen of the Original
Playlist or User Playlist.
9. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
333
Features
NOTE:
After selecting the track for which
you want to change the track title,
you can also push the interface
selector down to display the AUDIO
MENU, and then select Edit Track.
The subsequent procedure is the
same as step 4.
08/09/04 18:08:12 31TK4600 0339 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Artist Name of the
Original Playlist or User Playlist
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist artist name or a
desired album to change the
original playlist artist name. Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 325 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit User Playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist
Name), then press ENTER on the
interface selector in Edit Album
(or Edit Playlist) screen.
334
4. On the Edit Album Name screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Artist, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
5. On the Enter an artist name
screen input the new artist name.
6. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
7. The confirmation screen is
displayed. Choose if you would
like to apply the new name to both
the album artist and/or the track
artist. Select Yes or No by turning
the dial, then press ENTER.
08/07/29 18:31:02 31TK4600 0340 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. On the Edit Track Name screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Edit Artist, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
8. Confirm that the new name is
correct, and then push the
interface selector down to select
OK. You will be returned to the
Edit Album Name screen.
6. Input the new track name on the
Enter an artist name screen.
Changing the Artist Name of the
Track
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the artist name. Refer to the
Music Search function on page
325 for how to select a playlist.
Rotate the interface dial to select
the currently playing track.
7. After inputting the name, push the
selector down to select OK. You
will be returned to the Edit Track
Name screen.
2. The OPTIONS icon will appear in
the selected track. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
8. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
3. The track options box is displayed.
Select Edit Track Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
NOTE:
After selecting the track for which
you want to change the artist’s name,
you can also push the interface
selector down to display the AUDIO
MENU, and then select Edit Track.
The subsequent procedure is the
same as step 4.
4. On the Edit Track screen, turn the
interface dial and select Edit
Track Name, then press ENTER
on the interface selector.
335
Features
9. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
08/07/29 18:31:11 31TK4600 0341 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. On the Edit Album Name screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Edit Genre, and then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Changing the Musical Genre
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist music genre, or a
desired album to change the
original playlist music genre. Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 325 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
5. Turn the interface dial on the
Select a genre screen to select the
Original Playlist or User Playlist
that you want to change the genre
and then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will be
returned to the Edit Album Name
screen.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit User Playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist
Name), then press ENTER on the
interface selector in Edit Album
(or Edit Playlist) screen.
336
6. Push the selector down to select
OK. The screen returns to the
playlist.
08/07/29 18:31:19 31TK4600 0342 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting a Track
1. Select the track with the interface
dial from the playback screen
while it is playing. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
NOTE:
When you delete a track from the
Original Playlist, the track is also
deleted from the User Playlist in
which the deleted track was
stored.
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
3. The track options box is displayed.
Select Delete and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
4. Select OK to confirm you want to
delete the track. You will be
returned to the Playback screen
for the Original Playlist or User
Playlist.
337
Features
2. The OPTIONS icon will appear in
the selected track. Press ENTER
on the interface selector.
08/07/29 18:31:30 31TK4600 0343 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting an Album
1. On the HDD playback screen of
the album in which you want to
delete, push the interface selector
down to display AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit User Playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
3. On the Edit Album (or Edit
Playlist) screen, turn the interface
dial and select Delete Album (or
Delete Playlist), then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
4. The delete box is displayed. Select
OK and then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will be
returned to the Playback screen
for the Original Playlist or User
Playlist.
NOTE:
When you delete the Original
Playlist, any tracks stored in a
User Playlist are also deleted.
Adding a Track or Album to the
User Playlist
1. While playing back an Original
Playlist or User Playlist that you
want to add to a different User
Playlist, push the interface
selector down to display AUDIO
MENU.
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you
want to edit an User Playlist), and
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
338
08/07/29 18:31:39 31TK4600 0344 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
3. On the Edit Album (or Edit
Playlist) screen, turn the interface
dial and select Add to Playlist, and
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
3. On the Playlist screen, turn the
interface dial and select the
Playlist to which the song is to be
added, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will be
returned to the Playback screen
for the Original Playlist.
NOTE:
When adding from and to the same
User Playlist, the same tracks will be
stored twice.
NOTE:
When adding from and to the same
User Playlist, the same tracks will be
stored twice.
2. The track options box is displayed.
Select Add to Playlist, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
339
Features
4. On the Playlist screen, turn the
interface dial and select a desired
User Playlist, then press ENTER
on the interface selector. You will
be returned to the Playback
screen for the Original Playlist or
User Playlist.
Adding a Track to a User Playlist
1. While a track is playing on an
Original Playlist or User Playlist
Playback screen, turn the
interface dial and select the track
that you want to add to a User
Playlist, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
08/07/29 18:31:49 31TK4600 0345 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Acquiring Title Information
1. Push the interface selector down
to display AUDIO MENU.
Checking HDD Audio Capacity
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
REMAINING CAPACITY
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Get Album Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
3. On the Select an Album screen,
turn the interface dial and select
the title information for the
Original Playlist, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
You will be returned to the Audio
Menu screen.
340
Updating Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database)
You can update the Gracenote
Album Info (Gracenote Media
Database) that is included with the
navigation system.
NOTE:
Consult your dealer, or visit
www.acura.com (in U.S.), or
www.acura.ca (in Canada), to acquire
updated files.
VERSION
You can check the HDD Audio
capacity and remaining space as well
as the Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB) version included
with the navigation system on the
HDD Setup screen.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc
slot, or connect the USB flash
memory device that includes the
update.
08/09/04 18:08:29 31TK4600 0346 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. Turn the interface dial and select
Update Gracenote Info, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
HDD Setup, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
5. Turn the dial to select USB or
DISC on the Update Gracenote
Album info screen, then press
ENTER on the selector.
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
interface dial to select Set up, and
press ENTER.
6. Turn the dial to select Yes on the
confirmation screen, and the
update will start.
2. Move the interface selector to the
right to navigate to the Set up
(Other) screen.
7. Turn the interface dial to select
OK on the confirmation screen.
3. On the Set up (Other) tab, rotate
the interface dial to select Clear
Personal Data, and press ENTER.
8. After updating is complete, press
ENTER on the confirmation
screen.
4. Select the item you wish to
delete.
NOTE:
Once you perform an update any
information you edited before will be
overwritten.
CONTINUED
341
Features
2. Push the interface selector down
to select AUDIO MENU in the
HDD playback screen or CD
playback screen.
Clearing the HDD
Any music, data, calendar entries,
etc. that have been stored on the
HDD can be deleted.
08/09/04 18:08:40 31TK4600 0347 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. A pop-up screen verifying whether
the deletion is to be continued or
not will be displayed. Select Yes to
delete, or No to cancel.
6. A second confirmation will appear.
Select Yes to delete, or No to
cancel.
7. When you are finished deleting
the data, press the interface
selector down to select Done.
NOTE: If you select Music on HDD,
the system will automatically restart
after deletion.
342
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote . Gracenote is the
industry standard in music
recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more
information, please visit http://www.
gracenote.com/.
When music is recorded to the HDD
from a CD, information such as the
recording artist and track name are
retrieved from the Gracenote
Database and displayed (when
available). Gracenote may not
contain information for all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist,
album, and track information from
CDs and MP3 files to display on the
HDD. Gracenote users are allowed 4
free updates a year. More
information about Gracenote, its
features, and downloads are
available at www.acura.com (in U.S.)
or www.acura.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000−
2008 Gracenote.
08/09/04 18:08:49 31TK4600 0348 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the ‘‘Powered by Gracenote’’ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote End User License
Agreement
Version 20061005
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (‘‘Gracenote’’).
The software from Gracenote (the
‘‘Gracenote Software’’) enables this
application to perform disc and/or
file identification and obtain musicrelated information, including name,
artist, track, and title information
(‘‘Gracenote Data’’) from online
servers or embedded databases
(collectively, ‘‘Gracenote Servers’’)
and to perform other functions. You
may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or
device.
You agree that you will use
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial
use only.
You agree not to assign, copy,
transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive
license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if
you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers.
CONTINUED
343
Features
Gracenote Software, copyright 2000
−2008 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of
the following U.S. Patents: ♯
5,987,525; ♯6,061,680; ♯6,154,773,
♯6,161,132, ♯6,230,192, ♯6,230,207,
♯6,240,459, ♯6,330,593, and other
patents issued or pending. Some
services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: ♯
6,304,523.
08/09/04 18:08:58 31TK4600 0349 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to
you for any information that you
provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its
own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a
randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote
service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are.
For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed
to you ‘‘AS IS.’’
344
Gracenote makes no representations
or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote Servers or to
change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its services
at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE
DOES NOT WARRANT THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER.
IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Gracenote 2008
08/07/29 18:35:21 31TK4600 0350 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
(VOLUME/POWER)
CENTER DISPLAY
HDD/AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
345
Features
VOL/
KNOB
08/07/29 18:35:30 31TK4600 0351 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the indash disc player. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector, then press the
HDD/AUX button. The power mode
must be ACCESSORY or ON. The
iPod will also be charged with the
power mode in these settings.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
346
The audio system reads and plays
sound files to be playable on the iPod.
The system cannot operate an iPod
as a mass storage device. The
system will only play songs stored on
the iPod with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
the play mode functions.
iPods that are compatible with your
audio system are listed below.
Model
iPod 5G
iPod classic
iPod nano
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod touch
iPhone
Firmware*
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
*: Use the latest firmware.
Use only compatible iPods with the
latest firmware. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
08/07/29 18:35:40 31TK4600 0352 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Connecting an iPod
USB CONNECTOR
DOCK CONNECTOR
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
In AAC format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, the
audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
and then skips to the next file.
Features
Do not keep the iPod and dock
connector cable in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pulling it up, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
CONTINUED
347
08/07/29 18:35:47 31TK4600 0353 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Sample Display
* : It may take a few minutes for
the Acura logo to display on the
iPod. If the display does not
change, this function is not
supported on your iPod model
or firmware.
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
OK to disconnect.
When the iPod is connected and the
iPod mode is selected on the audio
system, the iPod indicator is shown
in the center display. If you selected
the audio control display by pressing
the AUDIO button, you will see the
iPod icon on the screen. After
loading, you will see the Acura logo*
on the iPod. That means you can
only operate your iPod using the
vehicle’s audio unit.
348
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
ipod.
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed in the center display.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
names on the navigation screen.
08/07/29 18:35:55 31TK4600 0354 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
To move rapidly within playing track,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
Features
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
You can also select a track from any
category on the list: playlists, artists,
albums and songs, by using the
interface dial.
Press ENTER on the interface
selector to display the items on that
list, then turn the interface dial to
make a selection. Press ENTER to
set your selection.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Music Search screen.
Turn the interface dial to select a
desired search method.
CONTINUED
349
08/07/29 18:36:03 31TK4600 0355 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.
REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
The track order that appears at this
time varies depending on the iPod
model and firmware.
350
1. Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then
push the interface selector down
to display AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Repeat, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
08/07/29 18:36:12 31TK4600 0356 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Repeat icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Playback of
the track that is currently being
played will be repeated.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Shuffle icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
SHUFFLE ICON
Shuffle playback will begin. To
cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
SHUFFLE − This feature shuffles
playback of tracks contained within
the iPod. This function can be
established at the same time that
Repeat Playback is set up.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
CONTINUED
351
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
08/09/04 18:09:10 31TK4600 0357 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Album Shuffle icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Shuffle playback of the album will
begin.
ALBUM SHUFFLE ICON
ALBUM SHUFFLE − Shuffles
playback of all available albums,
which are selected by the desired
list: playlists, artists, albums or songs.
This function can be selected at the
same time that Repeat Playback is
setup.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
352
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To play the radio, press the AM/FM,
or XM button. Press the DISC button
to switch to the disc mode. Press the
HDD/AUX button to switch the
audio mode between HDD Audio
and Bluetooth Audio.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
08/07/29 18:36:29 31TK4600 0358 Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
* : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page 354 .
Features
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the center display and
the audio screen (if selected) show
USB NO DATA.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
When you connect your iPod to the
navigation system, the most recent
settings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will be
carried over.
353
08/07/29 18:36:34 31TK4600 0359 iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
354
Error Message
UNSUPORTED Ver.
CONNECT RETRY
NO SONG
Solution
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated.
Appears when there are no files in the iPod.
08/07/29 18:36:39 31TK4600 0360 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
(VOLUME/POWER)
CENTER DISPLAY
HDD/ AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
CATEGORY BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/
AUTO SELECT) BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
355
Features
VOL/
KNOB
08/07/29 18:36:50 31TK4600 0361 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the disc player. To
play a USB flash memory device,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment, then
press the HDD/AUX button until
you see ‘‘AUX’’ in the display. The
power mode must be ACCESSORY
or ON.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
356
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC* formats. The USB flash
memory device limit is up to 700
folders or up to 15000 files.
* : Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 Mbyte or
higher. Some digital audio players
may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as it or your
files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
08/07/29 18:37:03 31TK4600 0362 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kbps (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48/64/88.2/
96 kbps (MPEG2)
32/44.1/48/64/88.2/96/128/
176.4/192 kbps (MPEG2.5)
−Bitrate:
8−320 kHz
−Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
−Partition: Top partition only
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
−Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/144/160/192/224/256
kbps
−Partition: Top partition only
Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or
AAC format, a file with unsupported
version cannot be played. If the
system finds it, the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
48 kHz
−Bitrate:
48−20 kbps
CONTINUED
357
Features
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be
cases where character information
does not display properly.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.
08/07/29 18:37:10 31TK4600 0363 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
USB CONNECTOR
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Unclip the USB connector by
pulling it up, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
358
USB ADAPTER CABLE
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
08/07/29 18:37:19 31TK4600 0364 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists
Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
Features
When the USB device is connected
and the USB mode is selected on the
audio system, the USB indicator is
shown in the center display. It also
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the USB indicator, the folder and file
names, and the elapsed time in the
navigation screen.
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it twice to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the interface
dial. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display on the
navigation screen. Use the interface
dial to highlight the file, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
CONTINUED
359
08/07/29 18:37:31 31TK4600 0365 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio mode display.
TRACK REPEAT
REPEAT OFF ICON
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU.
You can select any type of repeat,
random or scan mode on the audio
menu screen.
Push the selector up to display the
folder list screen, then turn the
interface dial to select a folder. Press
ENTER to set your selection.
If you have more than one layer of
folders (folders within folders), you
can also see each folder on the
screen.
360
Move the interface selector up to
select BACK to show the USB
screen, or press the CANCEL button
to return to the previous screen.
TRACK REPEAT ICON
This function repeats playback of the
track.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
08/07/29 18:37:40 31TK4600 0366 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface knob, select the
Track Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the track that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also cancels this function.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
This function replays all the tracks in
a folder in the order that they were
stored.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
361
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Folder Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the folder that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
08/07/29 18:37:51 31TK4600 0367 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
TRACK RANDOM
RANDOM OFF ICON
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Track Random icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The tracks are played in random
order.
FOLDER RANDOM
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This function plays all the tracks on
the USB flash memory device in
randam order.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
362
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
This function plays all of the tracks
in the current folder in random order.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
08/07/29 18:38:00 31TK4600 0368 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Folder Random icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The files are played in random
order.
TRACK SCAN
SCAN OFF ICON
TRACK SCAN ICON
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector to play the last
track sampled.
This function samples all the tracks
in the current folder in the order that
they were recorded.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
363
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Track Scan icon and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Each
track or file is sampled for 10
seconds. When all the tracks in
the folder have been scanned,
regular playback is resumed.
08/07/29 18:38:09 31TK4600 0369 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Folder Scan icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
FOLDER SCAN
The first file of the first folder is
sampled for 10 seconds. If no other
operations are carried out, the first
files of the remaining folders are
played for 10 seconds. After the first
file of the last folder is played back,
regular playback is resumed.
FOLDER SCAN ICON
This function samples the first file in
each folder within the USB flash
memory device.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
364
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To play the radio, press the AM/FM,
or XM button. Press the DISC button
to switch to the disc mode. Press the
HDD/AUX button to switch the
mode between the HDD Audio, USB,
and Bluetooth Audio.
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
08/07/29 18:38:15 31TK4600 0370 Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Features
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
If you see an error message in the
center display, see page 366 .
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
365
08/07/29 18:38:19 31TK4600 0371 USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message
FILE ERROR
UNSUPORTED
UNPLAYABLE FILE
NO SONG
366
Solution
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash
memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been
damaged.
Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
Appears when the file is copyright protectd, such as DRM.
Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memory
device.
08/07/29 18:38:25 31TK4600 0372 Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
CENTER DISPLAY
TITLE BUTTON
HDD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SKIP BAR
INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
367
08/07/29 18:38:33 31TK4600 0373 Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on Bluetooth Audio
Compatible phones that are paired
and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 426 ).
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by
calling the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
1-888-9-ACURA-9.
NOTE: In some states it may be
illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
368
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
message and icon on the center
display and the audio control display
on the navigation screen (if selected),
and the system begins to play.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. For more information to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to the HFL.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
Press the HDD/AUX button* with
the power mode ACCESSORY or
ON. When the phone is recognized,
you will see the Bluetooth Audio
*: If an iPod or USB flash memory
device or audio unit connected
to the auxiliary input jack was
selected at the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB or AUX in the
center display and the audio
control display on the navigation
screen (if selected). Push the
HDD/AUX button again to play
audio files from your Bluetooth
Audio phone.
08/07/29 18:38:42 31TK4600 0374 Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Once a device is linked, the name of
the device will appear on the screen.
Pressing the TITLE button switches
the center display between the
Bluetooth Audio and the device
name.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
If your Bluetooth Audio compatible
phone does not operate as described,
make sure it is an Acura approved
phone. To find out if your phone is
approved, go to www.acura.com/
handsfreelink (in Canada, www.acura.
ca), or call the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
To skip a file
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
CONTINUED
369
Features
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be delay
before the system begins to play.
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’
message after pressing the TITLE
button.
08/07/29 18:38:49 31TK4600 0375 Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To pause or resume a file
Turn the interface dial to switch the
setting between the resume/pause
mode and the sound setup mode.
Select Resume/Pause, then press
ENTER to set your selection. Each
time you press ENTER, the system
switches between the resume mode
and pause mode.
To change sound settings
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily.
370
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control display. Turn the
dial to switch the setting between
the resume/pause mode and the
sound setup mode. Select Sound
Setup, then press ENTER to set your
selection.
08/07/29 18:38:57 31TK4600 0376 Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Turn the dial to select a sound setup
mode, then press ENTER to set your
selection. See page 288 for more
sound setting information.
To switch to HFL mode
After ending the call, press the
HANG-UP button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
Select any other audio mode by
pressing a button; AM/FM,
or
DISC on the audio control panel, or
press the MODE button on the
steering wheel to select another
audio mode.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
371
Features
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press
the PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel. The screen and the center
display switch to the HFL mode (see
page 424 ).
To turn off the Bluetooth Audio
mode
08/07/29 18:39:05 31TK4600 0377 AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
Your vehicle’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
372
Radio Reception
How well your vehicle’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and
atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
08/07/29 18:39:11 31TK4600 0378 AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
373
08/07/29 18:39:19 31TK4600 0379 Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
374
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM radio, disc (if a disc is loaded),
HDD (on models with navigation
system), Bluetooth Audio (if
paired), AUX (if an appropriate audio
unit is connected).
If an iPod or a USB flash memory
device is plugged into the system,
you can also select AUX.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
preset station. If you press and hold
the CH button (+) or (−), the
system goes into the skip (seek)
mode. It stops when it finds a station
with a strong signal.
To activate the seek function, press
and hold the top (+) or bottom (−)
of the CH button until you hear a
beep. The system searches up or
down from the current frequency to
find a station with a strong signal.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track/file (file in MP3, WMA, or
AAC format) each time you press
the top (+) of the CH button. Press
the bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track/file.
Press it twice to return to the
previous track/file.
08/07/29 18:39:27 31TK4600 0380 Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
If you are playing a USB flash
memory device or iPod with the USB
adapter cable, press and release the
top (+) of the CH button to skip
forward to the beginning of the next
file. Press the bottom (−) to skip
backward to the beginning to the
current file. Press it twice to return
to the previous file.
Auxiliary Input Jack
On models without navigation system
If you are playing a conventional CD
(without the text data and not
compressed in MP3 or WMA), you
can use the skip function to select
discs. Press and hold the top (+) of
the CH button until you hear a beep,
to skip forward to the next disc.
Press and hold the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous disc.
Features
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top (+) of the
CH button until you hear a beep, to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
When playing a USB flash memory
device, you can also use the seek
function to skip the folder. To
activate this, press and hold either
side of the CH button until you hear
a beep.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
The auxiliary input jack is inside the
console compartment. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories using a
1/8 inch stereo miniplug.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the
HDD/AUX button (AUX button on
models without navigation system)
to select it.
375
08/07/29 18:39:33 31TK4600 0381 Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system may
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
You should have received a radio
code card that lists your audio
system’s code and serial numbers. It
is best to store this card in a safe
place at home. In addition, you
should write the audio system’s
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
376
NOTE:
If you have a My Acura account, you
can retrieve the anti-theft code
online.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display (on the center
display on models with navigation
system) the next time you turn on
the system. Use the preset buttons
to enter the five-digit code. The code
is on the radio code card included in
your owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.
08/07/29 18:39:43 31TK4600 0382 Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
On models without navigation system
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
CLOCK BUTTON
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
(reset) button to set the time back to
the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the same
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.
U.S. model is shown.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
On models with navigation system
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
CONTINUED
377
Features
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
08/09/04 18:09:22 31TK4600 0383 Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system
Adjusting the Clock with SETUP
Button
You can also adjust the clock and
switch the clock display between 24hours and 12-hours in the menu
mode.
To adjust the clock setting:
1. Press and release the SETUP
button. The display shows you the
menu items.
You can adjust the clock setting
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
378
2. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’
3. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display changes to the clock
adjusting display.
4. Turn the selector knob to select
the item which you want to adjust.
Turning the selector knob will
change the selected item between
the clock display setting, hours,
minutes, and SET. The selected
item is indicated with △ in the
display.
08/07/29 18:40:03 31TK4600 0384 Setting the Clock
While setting the clock, pressing
the RETURN button will go back
to the previous display.
Pressing the SETUP button again
will cancel this setting mode.
Features
MINUTE SETTING
5. Turn the selector knob to change
the setting between 12H and 24H.
6. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.
7. To set the time, turn the selector
knob and select the hours or the
minutes, then press the knob to
enter your selection. The display
changes to the setting display.
8. Turn the selector knob to count
the numbers up or down.
9. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock
adjusting display.
CONTINUED
379
08/09/04 18:12:20 31TK4600 0385 Setting the Clock
10. To enter the clock setting, turn
the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’
then press the knob. The display
will return to the menu item
display.
11. Press either the RETURN or
SETUP button to go back to the
normal display.
380
08/09/04 18:12:30 31TK4600 0386 Security System
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
driver’s lock tab, master door lock
switch, or remote transmitter
(keyless access remote on models
with keyless access system). The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter/
keyless access remote), the hood, or
the trunk will cause the system to
alarm. It also alarms if the audio unit
is removed from the dashboard or
the wiring is cut.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter/keyless access remote
without triggering the alarm. The
alarm will sound if the trunk is
opened with the trunk release button
on the driver’s door, the trunk
release handle behind the trunk
pass-through cover, or the
emergency trunk opener.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and trunk open
monitor on the multi-information
display (see page 11 ) to see if the
doors and trunk are fully closed.
Since it is not part of the monitor
display, manually check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
381
Features
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
activated system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or use the
remote transmitter/keyless access
remote.
08/09/04 18:12:42 31TK4600 0387 Compass
On models without navigation system
Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Compass Calibration
COMPASS
COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS
U.S. model is shown.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass is
self-calibrating, then the compass
display is shown in the display.
382
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, or the compass
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following.
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
08/09/04 18:12:53 31TK4600 0388 Compass
5. Press the selector knob (ENTER).
The compass display is blinking
and the CAL indicator is shown.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’
4. Press the selector knob (ENTER)
to enter your selection. The
display shows you ‘‘PUSH CAL
START.’’
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is calibrating, the
display returns to the normal display
which you last selected.
While setting the compass,
pressing the RETURN button will
go back to the previous display.
Pressing the SETUP button will
cancel the compass setting mode.
383
Features
When the calibration is successfully
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
08/07/29 18:40:43 31TK4600 0389 Compass
Compass Zone Selection
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to enter your selection.
The display shows you the
currently selected zone number.
384
ZONE NUMBER
4. Find the zone for your area on the
map (see page 385 ). If the correct
zone is not shown, turn the
selector knob to cycle the zone
lists up or down.
If necessary, press the RETURN
button to return to the previous
display. Pressing the SETUP
button will cancel the compass
setting mode.
5. Once the correct zone is displayed,
press the selector knob. The
display then returns to normal.
08/07/29 18:40:47 31TK4600 0390 Compass
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is in the zone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
Zone Map
Features
385
08/07/29 18:40:55 31TK4600 0391 Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel will come on.
The cruise control system can be
left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
386
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
08/07/29 18:41:04 31TK4600 0392 Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle speeds up about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel goes out. When
the vehicle slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/DECEL
button.
387
Features
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
08/07/29 18:41:11 31TK4600 0393 Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
388
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on, and the vehicle accelerates to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
08/07/29 18:41:21 31TK4600 0394 HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
of the way of the device to prevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
To do this, press and hold the two
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
CONTINUED
389
Features
General Safety Information
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
08/07/29 18:41:35 31TK4600 0395 HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
390
08/07/29 18:41:39 31TK4600 0396 HomeLink Universal Transceiver
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Features
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
391
08/07/29 18:41:47 31TK4600 0397 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
On models without navigation system
Your vehicle is equipped with
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).
HFL uses Bluetooth technology to
link your cell phone to your vehicle.
With HFL, you can place and receive
calls through your vehicle’s audio
system, without the distraction of
handling your cell phone. To use this
feature, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone with the
Hands Free Profile. For more
information, and a list of compatible
cell phones, visit www.acura.com/
handsfreelink, or call 1-888-528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
1-888-9-ACURA-9. HFL is available in
English on U.S. models, and in both
English and French on Canadian
models. To change the language, see
page 418 .
Here are the main features of HFL.
Instructions for using HFL begin on
page 407 .
392
Voice Control
HFL recognizes simple voice
commands, such as phone numbers
and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
Using Voice Control on page 396 .
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to HFL. HFL
uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
To use HFL, your phone must have
approved Bluetooth capability along
with the Hands Free Profile. This
type of phone is available through
many phone makers and cellular
carriers. You can also find an
approved phone by visiting
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by
calling the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
1-888-9-ACURA-9.
08/07/29 18:41:56 31TK4600 0398 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Incoming/Outgoing Calls
With a linked phone, HFL allows you
to send and receive calls in your
vehicle without holding the phone.
You can also store the desired
number to the HFL phonebook
directly from your cell phone using
the receive contact function in HFL.
Audio System
When HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle’s front
audio system speakers. If the audio
system is in use while operating
either of the HFL buttons or making
a call, HFL overrides the audio
system. To change the volume level,
use the audio system volume knob or
the steering wheel volume controls.
For more information on how to
store the number, see page 415 . To
make a call, see page 407 .
Microphone
The HFL microphone is on the
ceiling, in front of the map lights.
393
Features
Help Assistance
The HFL system has a help function
to provide instructions for pairing a
phone, and give hints on how to
operate HFL properly. If your
response or command is not correct,
or the system cannot recognize a
command, the HFL system will give
you an appropriate command or play
the help prompt.
Phonebook
HFL can store up to 50 names and
phone numbers in its phonebook.
With a linked phone, you can then
automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
08/07/29 18:42:05 31TK4600 0399 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
The HFL buttons are used as
follows:
HFL Buttons
HFL TALK BUTTON
HFL Talk: This button is used before
you give a command, and to answer
incoming calls.
Multi-Information Display
SIGNAL
STRENGTH
HFL
MODE
BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS
Press and release the button, then
wait for a beep before giving a
command.
HFL BACK
BUTTON
To operate HFL, use the HFL Talk
and Back buttons on the left side of
the steering wheel.
394
HFL Back: This button is used to
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
cancel an operation.
ROAM STATUS
PHONE DIALING
When you are operating HFL, or
when you manually select HFL on
the multi-information display, you
will see this information on the
screen:
08/07/29 18:42:15 31TK4600 0400 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Signal Strength* − Indicates the
network signal strength of the
current phone. Five bars equals
full strength.
How to Use HFL
HFL is operated by the HFL Talk
and Back buttons on the left side of
the steering wheel. The next few
pages provide instructions for all
basic features of HFL.
ROAM Status* − Indicates your
phone is roaming.
HFL Mode − Indicates when you
are dialing and receiving calls.
Also displays which menu option
has been selected.
You will see ‘‘HANDS FREE LINK’’
and the ‘‘
’’ indicator on the
audio display when you operate HFL.
Phone Dialing − Indicates the
number you entered or the
number of the incoming call.
* : Some phones do not send this
information to HFL.
395
Features
NOTE: All phones may not
operate identically, and some
may cause inconsistent operation
of HFL.
Battery Level Status* − Indicates
the power currently remaining in
your phone’s battery. Five bars
equals full battery strength.
08/07/29 18:42:24 31TK4600 0401 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Using Voice Control
Here are some guidelines for using
voice control:
Adjust the airflow from both the
dashboard and side vents so they
do not blow against the
microphone on the ceiling.
Close the windows and the
moonroof.
To enter a command, press and
release the HFL Talk button. After
the beep, say your command in a
clear, natural tone.
When voice commands are used,
the fan speed will be automatically
adjusted to low. However, for
better voice recognition, lowering
the fan speed may be necessary.
396
If the microphone picks up voices
other than yours, the system may
not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
If HFL does not recognize a
command, its response is ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
command it plays an appropriate
Help prompt. Response time may
vary depending on the voice
command.
To hear a list of available options
at any time, press the HFL Talk
button, wait for the beep, and say
‘‘Hands free help’’ or ‘‘Help.’’
When you are at the main menu,
you can hear general HFL
information such as pairing or
setting up the system. Press the
HFL Talk button, wait for the beep,
and say ‘‘Tutorial.’’
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
To enter a string of numbers in a
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
10, and 11.
To skip a voice prompt, press the
HFL Talk button while HFL is
speaking. HFL will then begin
listening for your next command.
08/07/29 18:42:33 31TK4600 0402 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To end a command sequence at
any time, press and hold the HFL
Back button, or press and release
the HFL Talk button, wait for the
beep, and say ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next
time you press the HFL Talk
button, HFL begins from the main
menu.
When you finish a command
sequence, HFL returns to idle. For
example, when you store the name
‘‘Eric,’’ the HFL system response
is ‘‘Eric has been stored.’’ The
next time you press the HFL Talk
button, HFL begins from the main
menu.
Pairing Your Phone
Your Bluetooth compatible phone
with Hands Free Profile must be
paired to HFL before you can make
and receive hands-free calls. To
confirm that your phone is
Bluetooth compatible, visit www.
acura.com/handsfreelink, or call (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9ACURA-9. Your phone retailer
should also be able to confirm that
your phone is Bluetooth compatible.
NOTE:
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
For pairing, your phone must be in
its discovery mode (searching for
a Bluetooth related device).
Up to six phones can be paired to
HFL.
CONTINUED
397
Features
To go back one step in a command
process, say ‘‘Go back,’’ or press
the HFL Back button.
If nothing is said while HFL is
listening for a command, HFL will
time out and stop its voice
recognition, then prompt you with
available options or help
information. The next time you
press the HFL Talk button, HFL
begins listening from the point at
which it timed out.
08/07/29 18:42:39 31TK4600 0403 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair
your phone to HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
operating manual, visit www.acura.
com/handsfreelink, call the
HandsFreeLink consumer
support at (888) 528-7876, or call
your phone retailer. In Canada,
call (888) 9-ACURA-9.
During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones
before pairing a new phone.
Each time a phone is paired with
HFL, the system selects a pairing
code randomly or sequentially.
You can switch this setting
between random mode and fixed
mode. To select a pairing code
setting between Random and
Fixed, refer to page 403 .
398
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
To pair your first phone, follow the
prompts on the HFL system:
1. Park your vehicle. With your
phone on and the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button.
HFL prompts ‘‘Welcome to
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. This
system enables hands-free usage
of a mobile phone. Before using
this system, a phone needs to be
paired or connected with
HandsFreeLink. Would you like to
pair a phone now? Press the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Talk
button, and after the beep, say Yes,
to begin the pairing process, or No,
to continue.’’
08/07/29 18:42:48 31TK4600 0404 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
NOTE: Steps 4 and 5 show a
common way to get your phone into
its discovery mode (searching for a
Bluetooth related device). If these
steps do not work on your phone,
refer to the phone’s operating
manual.
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, if you say No, HFL
responds ‘‘Would you like to hear
the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
tutorial now? Press the Talk
button and after the beep, say yes
to begin the tutorial, or say No to
exit HandsFreeLink.’’
4. Follow the prompts on your phone
to get it into its discovery mode.
The phone will search for HFL.
When it comes up, select
HandsFreeLink from the list of
options displayed on your phone.
5. When asked by the phone, enter
the four-digit code from step 3 into
your phone.
HFL responds ‘‘HandsFreeLink
has connected to a new phone. A
name is needed to identify this
phone. Press the Talk button and
say a name. For example, John’s
phone.’’
If you say Yes, HFL will begin the
tutorial. Follow the prompts on
HFL.
*: For example
Go to Step 4.
CONTINUED
399
Features
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Entering phone set up:
pair menu. The pairing process
requires operation of your
Bluetooth phone. For safety, only
perform this function while the
vehicle is stopped.’’
HFL responds ‘‘For proper system
function a compatible Bluetooth
phone is required. Please visit the
HandsFreeLink website, listed in
the owner’s manual, for a list of
approved phones and other system
information. HandsFreeLink is
waiting to pair with a Bluetooth
phone. From your phone, search
for Bluetooth devices and select
HandsFreeLink.’’
HFL responds ‘‘When prompted
by your mobile phone, enter the
pairing code: <1234*>.’’
08/07/29 18:42:58 31TK4600 0405 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
6. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to use. For example, say
‘‘John’s phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘<John’s phone>
has been successfully paired.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Would you like to
hear the Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink tutorial now?
Press the Talk button and after
the beep, say Yes to begin the
tutorial, or say No to exit
HandsFreeLink.’’
If you press and release the Talk
button and say ‘‘Yes,’’ HFL begins
Tutorial. If you say ‘‘No,’’ HFL
returns to idle.
400
To pair another phone, do this:
To rename a paired phone, do this:
1. With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Phone setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phone setup
options are pair, edit, delete, list,
status, next phone, and set pairing
code. Press the Talk button and
say a command.’’
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phone setup
options are pair, edit, delete, list,
status, next phone, and set pairing
code. Press the Talk button and
say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’
3. Repeat steps 2 through 6 on page
399 .
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Which phone would like
to edit? Press the Talk button, and
say a name, or say List, to hear the
names of the paired phones’’
With only one paired phone, for
example, <John’s phone>, HFL
responds ‘‘What is the new name
for <John’s phone>?’’ Then go to
step 4.
08/07/29 18:43:11 31TK4600 0406 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to rename.
For example, say ‘‘John’s phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What is the new
name for John’s phone? Press the
Talk button and say a name.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which phone
would like to delete? Press the
Talk button and say a name, or say
list, to hear the names of the
paired phone.’’
With only one paired phone, for
example, <John’s phone>, HFL
responds ‘‘Would you like to delete
<John’s phone>?’’ Then go to
step 4.
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to delete. For
example, say ‘‘John’s phone.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Would you like to delete
John’s phone? Press the Talk
button and say Yes or No.’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Preparing to
delete John’s phone. Press the
Talk button and say Continue;
otherwise say Go Back or Cancel.’’
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, if you say
‘‘Continue.’’
HFL responds ‘‘The phone has
been deleted.’’
‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel’’ does not
delete the phone.
CONTINUED
401
Features
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘The name has
been changed.’’
To delete a paired phone, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phone setup
options are pair, edit, delete, list,
status, next phone, and set pairing
code. Press the Talk button and
say a command.’’
08/07/29 18:43:23 31TK4600 0407 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To list all paired phones, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phone setup
options are pair, edit, delete, list,
status, next phone, and set pairing
code. Press the Talk button and
say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’
HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all
phones paired to the system have
been read, HFL responds ‘‘The
entire list has been read.’’
To find out the status of the phone being
used, do this:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phone setup
options are pair, edit, delete, list,
status, next phone, and set pairing
code. Press the Talk button and
say a command.’’
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phone setup
options are pair, edit, delete, list,
status, next phone, and set pairing
code. Press the Talk button and
say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ For
example, HFL responds ‘‘John’s
phone is linked. Battery strength
is three bars. Signal strength is
five bars, and the phone is
roaming.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Searching for the
next phone.’’
The system then disconnects the
linked phone and searches for
another paired phone. If the
system finds it, for example, HFL
responds ‘‘Paul’s phone is linked.’’
Some Phones may not send the
status information to the HFL
system.
402
If no other phones are found or
paired, the first phone remains
linked. For example, HFL responds
‘‘No other paired phones were
found/have been paired. Returning
to <John’s phone>.’’
08/07/29 18:43:33 31TK4600 0408 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Setting a Pairing Code
To change the setting mode, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phone setup
options are pair, edit, delete, list,
status, next phone, and set pairing
code. Press the Talk button and
say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Set Pairing
Code.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Each time a phone
is paired with HandsFreeLink, a
pairing code is used for security.
This code can be randomly
generated by HandsFreeLink, or
fixed, which is needed for some
Bluetooth devices with a preset
pairing code. Would you like to set
the pairing code as Random or
Fixed?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, to select the fixed
mode, say ‘‘Fixed.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What is the four
digit number you would like to set
as the pairing code? Press the Talk
button and say the number.’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say a desired fourdigit number. For example, say
‘‘1000.’’
HFL responds ‘‘1000. Is this
correct? Press the Talk button and
say Yes or No.’’
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, if the number is
correct, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘HandsFreeLink
will use this code when pairing to a
Bluetooth device.’’
6. If the number is not correct, say
‘‘No.’’ HFL goes back to step 3.
403
Features
When you pair your phone to HFL,
the HFL system will automatically
select a pairing code at random or in
order. You can customize this setting
mode between Random and Fixed. If
you select the fixed mode, the HFL
system will select a pairing code
sequentially.
08/07/29 18:43:45 31TK4600 0409 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Setting Up the System
You can select or change some
settings for the HFL system. Here
are the settings you can select or
change. To do this, make sure your
vehicle is parked safely, with your
phone on and the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
Setting a security passcode
You can set a four-digit security
passcode to lock the HFL system
for security purposes.
If you forget your passcode, you
cannot activate HFL. Consult your
dealer to cancel the passcode.
You can also select a ‘‘System
Clear’’ command to reset HFL
(see page 417 ).
Changing a security passcode
You can change the security
passcode.
404
Selecting the incoming
notification
The incoming notification can be
set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
notification. The default setting is
a prompt.
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What is the fourdigit number you would like to set
as your security passcode? Press
the Talk button and say the
number.’’
To set a security passcode, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘System setup
options are security, change
passcode, call notification, auto
transfer, and clear. Press the Talk
button and say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Security.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Security is
disabled. Would you like to enable
security? Press the Talk button
and say Yes or No.’’
If you say ‘‘No,’’ HFL returns to
idle.
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
passcode you want to use. For
example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’
HFL responds ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this
correct? Press the Talk button and
say Yes or No.’’
08/07/29 18:43:56 31TK4600 0410 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Once a passcode is set, HFL will
prompt you for your passcode each
time the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position and you press
the Talk button. You will only be
asked for the passcode once per
ignition cycle.
To enter your passcode, do this;
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, HFL prompts ‘‘The
system is locked. What is the fourdigit passcode?’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say your four-digit
passcode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,
4.’’
3. If the passcode is correct, HFL
responds ‘‘System is unlocked.’’
If the passcode is not correct, please
try again according to the HFL’s
guidance.
You can also select a ‘‘System Clear’’
command to reset HFL (see page
417 ).
To change your security passcode, do
this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘System setup
options are security, change
passcode, call notification, auto
transfer, and clear. Press the Talk
button and say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Change
passcode.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What is the four
digit number you would like to set
as your security passcode? Press
the Talk button and say the
number.’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say your four digit
passcode, for example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,
4.’’
CONTINUED
405
Features
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Security is on.
Each time the vehicle is turned on,
the passcode will be required to
use the system. If you forget this
passcode, you must either go to
the dealer to have it reset, or clear
the entire system using the
System Clear command.’’
08/07/29 18:44:05 31TK4600 0411 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
4. HFL responds ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this
correct? Press the Talk button and
say Yes or No.’’
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Security passcode
has been changed.’’
To set the incoming notification, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘System setup
options are security, change
passcode, call notification, auto
transfer, and clear. Press the Talk
button and say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Call
notification.’’
HFL responds: ‘‘Would you like
the incoming call notification to be
a ring tone, a prompt, or off?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, for example, say
‘‘Ring tone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘A ring tone will be
used.’’ You will hear a ring tone
through the audio speakers to
announce an incoming call.
406
If you say, ‘‘Prompt.’’ HFL responds
‘‘An incoming call prompt will be
used.’’ You will hear a ‘‘You have an
incoming call.’’ prompt when
receiving an incoming call.
If you say, ‘‘Off,’’ no audible
notification of an incoming call will
be selected. During an incoming call,
there is no ring tone or prompt
playback. The audio system will still
mute, and the HFL message or the
HFL notification screen will be
displayed.
08/07/29 18:44:15 31TK4600 0412 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To make a call using a phone number,
do this:
1. With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial? Press the Talk button and say
a name, a number, or say list to
hear the phonebook entries.’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob or the steering wheel
volume controls.
4. To end the call, press the Back
button.
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to call. For example, say
‘‘123 456 7891.’’
HFL responds ‘‘123 456 7891.
Press the Talk button and
continue to add numbers, or say
Call or Dial to place a call.’’
CONTINUED
407
Features
Making a Call
You can make calls using any phone
number, or by using a name in the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial
the last number called. During a call,
HFL allows you to talk up to 30
minutes after you remove the key
from the ignition switch. Continuing
a call without running the engine
may discharge and weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
08/07/29 18:44:25 31TK4600 0413 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To make a call using a name in the HFL
phonebook, do this:
1. With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial? Press the Talk button and say
a name, a number, or say list to
hear the phonebook entries.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to call. For example, say
‘‘John.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Would you like to
call John? Press the Talk button
and say Yes or No.’’
408
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob or the steering wheel
volume controls.
4. To end the call, press the Back
button.
To redial the last number called by the
phone, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Redial.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Redialing.’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers. To change the volume, use
the audio system volume knob or the
steering wheel volume controls.
08/07/29 18:44:36 31TK4600 0414 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To send a number during a call, do this:
To send a name during a call, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example,
say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’
HFL responds ‘‘1, 2, 3. Press the
Talk button and continue to add
numbers or say send.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to send. For example, say
‘‘Account number.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Would you like to
send account number? Press the
Talk button and say Yes or No.’’
NOTE: To send a pound (#), say
3. Press and release the Talk button.
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dial
tones will be sent, and the call will
3. Press and release the Talk button.
continue.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.
409
Features
Sending Numbers or Names
During a Call
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system. You can also program
account numbers into the HFL
phonebook for easy retrieval during
menu-driven calls.
08/07/29 18:44:45 31TK4600 0415 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Receiving a Call
If you receive a call when you are not
on the phone, HFL interrupts the
audio system (if it is on), and plays
the incoming call notification, if
activated. To answer the call, press
the Talk button and begin speaking.
If you don’t want to answer the call,
press the Back button.
If your phone has call waiting, and
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the
Talk button to answer it. When you
do this, the original call is placed on
hold. To return to the original call,
press the Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the new call,
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.
410
Transferring a Call
You can transfer a call from HFL to
your phone, or from your phone to
HFL.
To transfer a call from HFL to your
phone, or from your phone to HFL,
do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches between HFL and the
phone.
Automatic Transferring
This function allows you to transfer a
call automatically to the HFL system.
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, a call will be
transferred automatically to the HFL
system when you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
With this function activated, you can
also make a call by dialing with the
number keys on the phone which
has been paired to the HFL system.
The automatic transferring function
can be set to on or off.
08/07/29 18:44:53 31TK4600 0416 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To activate this function, do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Auto transfer.’’
If this feature is set to off, HFL
responds ‘‘Auto transfer is
disabled. Calls dialed on the phone
do not automatically transfer to
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. Would
you like to enable Auto Transfer?
Press the Talk button and say Yes
or No.’’
If this feature is set to on, HFL
responds ‘‘Auto-transfer is enabled.
Calls dialed on the phone will be
automatically transferred to
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. Would
you like to disable Auto Transfer?
Press the Talk button and say Yes
or No.’’
If the setting changes from on to off,
HFL responds ‘‘Auto transfer is
disabled. Use the Transfer command
at the HandsFree main menu to
manually transfer calls dialed on the
phone.’’
Features
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘System setup
options are security, change
passcode, call notification, auto
transfer, and clear. Press the Talk
button and say a command.’’
3. If the setting changes from off to
on, press and release the Talk
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Auto transfer is
enabled.’’
When you make a call directly from
the phone with the auto transfer on,
make sure to stop your vehicle safely.
To end the call, press the Back
button.
NOTE: Never try to dial from your
phone directly if the vehicle is
moving.
411
08/07/29 18:45:07 31TK4600 0417 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Muting a Call
During a call, you can mute or
unmute your voice to the person you
are talking to.
To mute your voice, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Mute is active.’’
Setting Up the Phonebook
The HFL phonebook can store up to
50 names with their associated
numbers. These can be any types of
numbers. For example, you can store
a phone number and use it to make a
call, or you can store an account
number and use it during a call to a
menu-driven phone system.
To unmute your voice, do this:
To add a name, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Mute is canceled.’’
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list. Press the
Talk button and say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What name would
you like to store? Press the Talk
button and say a name.’’
412
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘<John Smith>.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What is the
number for <John Smith>? Press
the Talk button and say the
number.’’
You can also say an account
number instead of <John Smith>.
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
HFL responds ‘‘123 456 7891.
Press the Talk button and
continue to add numbers or say
Enter.’’
08/07/29 18:45:20 31TK4600 0418 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
Use a consistent, even tone and
reduce background noise when
storing names, as the HFL voice
recognition can be sensitive.
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’
HFL responds ‘‘<John Smith>
has been stored.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What name would
you like to edit? Press the Talk
button and say a name or say list
to hear the phonebook entries.’’
If only one number is stored, HFL
responds ‘‘What is the new
number for Eric?’’ Then go to step
4.
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to edit. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What is the new
number for Eric? Press the Talk
button and say the number.’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new
number for Eric. For example, say
‘‘987 654 3219.’’
HFL responds ‘‘987 654 3219.
Press the Talk button and
continue to add numbers or say
enter.’’
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’
HFL responds ‘‘The number has
been changed.’’
CONTINUED
413
Features
HFL will be able to better
recognize multisyllabic name
entries (‘‘Peter’’ instead of ‘‘Pete’’),
or a longer name (‘‘John Smith’’
instead of ‘‘John’’).
To edit the number of a name, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list. Press the
Talk button and say a command.’’
08/07/29 18:45:31 31TK4600 0419 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To delete a name, do this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list. Press the
Talk button and say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’
HFL responds ‘‘What name would
you like to delete? Press the Talk
button and say a name or say list
to hear the phonebook entries.’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to delete. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Would you like to
delete Eric? Press the Talk button
and say Yes or No.’’
414
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘The name has
been deleted.’’
To list all names in the phonebook, do
this:
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list. Press the
Talk button and say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’
HFL responds by listing the names
in the phonebook in the order which
they were stored. After all names are
listed, HFL responds ‘‘The entire list
has been read.’’
08/07/29 18:45:40 31TK4600 0420 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To call a name from the phonebook list,
do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When it
says the name you want to call, for
example, <Eric>, press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Call.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Would you like to call <Eric>?
Press the Talk button and say Yes
or No.’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers. To change the volume, use
the audio system volume knob or the
steering wheel volume controls.
Storing a Phone Number Directly
from Your Phone
You can store the desired number to
the HFL phonebook directly from
your cell phone.
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit www.acura.com/
handsfreelink or call the
HandsFreeLink consumer support
at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit
www.acura.ca, or call 1-888-9-ACURA9. You can see your phone’s owner’s
manual for information.
CONTINUED
415
Features
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list. Press the
Talk button and say a command.’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Calling.’’
08/07/29 18:45:51 31TK4600 0421 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
1. With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Phonebook.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list. Press the
Talk button and say a command.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Receive
contact.’’
HFL responds ‘‘The receive
process requires operation of your
Bluetooth device. For safety, only
perform this function while the
vehicle is stopped. HandsFreeLink
is now waiting to receive a contact
from a Bluetooth device.’’
3. Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and send it via
Bluetooth (steps will vary for
phone types, follow your phone’s
operating manual).
HFL responds, for example ‘‘<2>
phone numbers have been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number
<1234567891>? Press the Talk
button and say a name or say
Discard, to discard this number.’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Neil at work.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Neil at work will
be stored. Is this correct? Press
the Talk button and say Yes or No.’’
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Neil at work has
been stored. Would you like
HandsFreeLink to receive another
contact? Press the Talk button and
say Yes or No.’’
Go to step 6.
If you say ‘‘No,’’ HFL returns to
idle.
6. If you want to continue to store
any other numbers, press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘HandsFreeLink is
now waiting to receive a contact
from a Bluetooth device.’’
Go back to step 3.
416
08/07/29 18:45:59 31TK4600 0422 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Clearing the System
This operation clears the HFL of
your passcode, your paired phones,
and all names in the HFL phonebook.
Clearing is recommended before you
sell your vehicle.
To clear the system, do this:
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’
HFL responds ‘‘This process will
clear all paired phones, clear all
entries in the phonebook, clear the
security passcode, and restore the
defaults in the system setup. Is
this what you would like to do?
Press the Talk button and say yes
or no.’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Preparing to clear
the system, which may take up to
two minutes to complete. To
proceed, press the Talk button and
say Continue, otherwise say Go
Back or Cancel.’’
4. After saying Continue, HFL
responds ‘‘Please wait while the
system is cleared.’’ HFL responds
‘‘The system has been cleared.’’
417
Features
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System setup.’’
HFL responds ‘‘System setup
options are security, change
passcode, call notification, auto
transfer, and clear. Press the Talk
button and say a command.’’
08/07/29 18:46:09 31TK4600 0423 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Changing Language
Canadian models only
To change language, say a command
with the current selected language.
The following example is changing
the language from English to French.
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Change
language.’’
HFL responds ‘‘English or
French?’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Vous avez
selectionné Français. Les noms
enregistres en mode Anglais ne
seron pas accessible en mode
Français. Voulez-vous continuer?
You have selected French. Name
tags that were stored while in
English mode will not be
accessible in French mode. Would
you like to continue? Press the
Talk button and say Yes or No.’’
418
3. Press and release the Talk button.
4. Example for changing name tags:
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Quel est le nom
If there are no paired phones
Français pour <Paul’s phone>?’’
without French name tags, HFL
Press and release the Talk button.
responds ‘‘Veuillez attendre que le
After the beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de
système change de langue. Please
Paul.’’
wait while the language is changed.’’
All paired phones missing a French
HFL responds ‘‘La langue a été
name tag are recorded, the HFL
changée.’’
system returns to idle.
NOTE: If there are paired phones
This process will also be required if
without French name tags, the
there are paired phones without
following prompts will continue.
English tags when changing from
French to English. HFL responds
If there are paired phones without
‘‘For the system to identify phones
French name tags, HFL responds
that were paired while in another
‘‘La langue a été changée. Pour
language, the phone names need to
que le système identifie les
be re-recorded.’’
téléphones qui ont été jumelés
dans une autre langue, les noms
des téléphones doivent etre réenregistrés.’’
08/07/29 18:46:17 31TK4600 0424 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Quick Language Selection
Canadian models only
To select a language quickly, do the
following.
For example, to change from French
to English.
If you want to continue, follow steps
3 and 4 on page 418 .
Features
1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’
HFL responds ‘‘You have selected
English. Name tags that were
stored while in French mode will
not be accessible in English mode.
Would you like to continue? Press
the Talk button and say Yes or No.’’
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
419
08/07/29 18:46:25 31TK4600 0425 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle is equipped with
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).
HFL uses Bluetooth technology to
link your cell phone to your vehicle.
With HFL, you can place and receive
calls through your vehicle’s
navigation system, without the
distraction of handling your cell
phone.
To use this feature, you need a
Bluetooth compatible cell phone with
the HandsFree Profile. For more
information, and a list of compatible
cell phones, visit www.acura.com/
handsfreelink, or call
HandsFreeLink customer support
at (888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit
www.acura.ca, or call (888) 9-ACURA9. HFL is available in English,
French, and Spanish.
Here are the main features of HFL.
Instructions for using HFL begin on
page 421 .
420
Voice Control
HFL recognizes simple voice
commands, such as phone numbers
and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. Voice commands
help to operate HFL on the
navigation screen. For more
information on voice control, see
Using Voice Control on page 424 .
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to HFL. HFL
uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
Incoming/Outgoing Calls
With a linked phone, HFL allows you
to send and receive calls in your
vehicle without holding the phone.
08/07/29 18:46:33 31TK4600 0426 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
NOTE: Your phone may not have
phonebook import function. Visit
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call
HandsFreeLink consumer support
at (888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit
www.acura.ca, or call (888) 9-ACURA9. You can also see your phone’s
owner’s manual for information.
Microphone
The HFL microphone is on the
ceiling, in front of the map lights.
The microphone is shared with the
navigation system.
How to Use HFL
HFL is operable by interaction with
the navigation screen with the
Interface Dial, the HFL buttons on
the steering wheel, or by voice.
Audio System
When HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle’s front
audio system speakers. If the audio
system is in use while operating
either of the HFL buttons or making
a call, HFL overrides the audio
system. To change the volume level,
use the audio system volume knob or
the steering wheel volume controls.
NOTE: All phones may not
operate identically, and some
may cause inconsistent operation
of HFL.
421
Features
Phonebook
Your vehicle’s HFL system allows
you to import your cellular
phonebook to HFL. Using the
navigation system, you can make a
call directly and store a desired
number in HFL from the list shown
on the navigation display. For more
information on how to import the
phonebook, see page 455 . To make
a call, see page 433 .
08/07/29 18:46:43 31TK4600 0427 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
CANCEL
BUTTON
INFO BUTTON
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.
DIAL
SELECTOR
ENTER
HFL system functions can be
accessed using the interface dial.
The interface dial has two parts, a
dial and a selector.
422
The dial turns left and right. Use it to
make selections from a list or menu
on the screen.
HFL Display
If you receive a call and you are on
the Cellular Phone screen, the
following screen is displayed:
CALLER NAME
BATTERY LEVEL
PHONE DIALING
STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
The CANCEL button clears the
current screen and returns to the
previous display.
The INFO button takes you to the
information menu, where you can
select the Cellular Phone screen.
You can also press the PICK-UP
button on the steering wheel to go
directly to the Cellular Phone screen.
ROAM STATUS
If this is not displayed, press the
INFO button, select Cellular Phone,
then press ENTER to display the
Cellular Phone screen. You can also
press the PICK-UP button on the
steering wheel to go directly to the
Cellular Phone screen.
08/07/29 18:46:53 31TK4600 0428 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Signal Strength* − Indicates the
network signal strength of the
current phone. Five bars equals
full strength.
* : Some phones do not send this
information to HFL.
caller chooses to hide the number
when making a call, ‘‘No Caller ID’’
will be displayed instead.
Incoming Call Display
Features
Battery Level Status* − Indicates
the power currently remaining in
your phone’s battery. Five bars
equals full battery strength.
ROAM Status* − Indicates your
phone is roaming.
Caller name/Phone dialing −
Indicates the number you dialed or
received, and a caller or receiver
name. Only the number will be
displayed if the caller or receiver’s
information has not been stored in
the phonebook.
‘‘
’’ indicator will be displayed on
the navigation display and center
display if your phone is linked to the
HFL system.
U.S. model is shown.
When you receive a phone call, a
pop-up will interrupt the display as
shown. This pop-up shows a caller
name and the phone number that
has been stored in the phonebook
(see page 455 ). While the system
searches for information from the
stored data, ‘‘Now acquiring call
information’’ will be displayed. If the
When you are operating HFL, or
dialing or receiving calls with the
audio system in use, you will see the
above screen.
423
08/07/29 18:47:05 31TK4600 0429 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
The HFL buttons are used as
follows:
HFL Buttons
PICK-UP BUTTON
HANG-UP
BUTTON
TALK
BUTTON
BACK BUTTON
To operate HFL, use the Pick-Up and
Hang-Up buttons on the left side of
the steering wheel.
If you use the voice commands to
operate HFL, also use the TALK and
BACK buttons.
TALK Button: This button activates
the voice control system and is used
for all voice commands. Press and
release it, wait for a beep, and give a
voice command.
BACK Button: This button has the
same function as the CANCEL
button. When you press and release
it, the current voice command is
canceled and the display returns to
the previous screen.
PICK-UP Button: This button is used
to answer incoming calls or to make
outgoing calls. You can also go
directly to the Cellular Phone screen
by pressing this button.
HANG-UP Button: This button is
used to end a call.
424
Using Voice Control
Here are some guidelines for using
voice control:
Adjust the airflow from both the
dashboard and side vents so they
do not blow against the
microphone on the ceiling.
Close the windows and the
moonroof.
When voice commands are used,
the fan speed will be automatically
adjusted to low. However, for
better voice recognition, lowering
the fan speed may be necessary.
To enter a command, press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say your command in a clear,
natural tone.
08/07/29 18:47:10 31TK4600 0430 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To enter a string of numbers in a
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can
separate them.
If HFL does not recognize a
command, its response is ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
command it plays an appropriate
Help prompt. Response time may
vary depending on the voice
command.
To skip a voice prompt, press the
Talk button while HFL is speaking.
HFL will then wait for your next
command.
Changing Language
You can change the voice guidance
and system language to English,
French, or Spanish. The language
you select will be also used for the
navigation system. Refer to the
navigation system manual for details.
Features
If the microphone picks up voices
other than yours, the system may
not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
To hear a list of available options
at any time, press the Talk button,
wait for the beep, and say ‘‘Help.’’
425
08/07/29 18:47:20 31TK4600 0431 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Pairing Your Phone
Your Bluetooth compatible phone
with HandsFree Profile must be
paired to HFL before you can make
and receive hands-free calls. To
confirm that your phone is Bluetooth
compatible, visit www.acura.com/
handsfreelink, or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
(888) 9-ACURA-9. Your phone
retailer should also be able to
confirm if your phone is Bluetooth
compatible.
NOTE:
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
Up to six phones can be paired to
HFL.
426
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair
your phone to HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
operating manual, visit www.acura.
com/handsfreelink, call the
HandsFreeLink consumer
support at (888) 528-7876, or call
your phone retailer. In Canada,
visit www.acura.ca, or call (888) 9ACURA-9.
During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones
before pairing a new phone.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
HFL operates best if your phone is
set to automatically recognize the
system (Discovery mode).
If after 3 minutes your phone is
not ready to pair or a phone is not
found, the system will time out
and start the pairing process from
the beginning.
1. Park the vehicle. With your phone
on and the vehicle’s power mode
in ACCESSORY or ON, press the
INFO button, rotate the interface
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
push ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
For more information on how to
select the power mode, see page
178 .
08/07/29 18:47:30 31TK4600 0432 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Example
Features
2. Move the interface selector down.
The ‘‘Phone setup’’ screen appears.
Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Setup
Bluetooth Phone,’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please select the phone
setup item.’’ Press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Setup Bluetooth Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Please select a
Bluetooth Phone item to setup.’’
3. Make sure your phone is in
Discovery mode at this point.
Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Pair
phone’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Pair phone.’’
4. When a screen message appears
that provides a pass-key, enter the
pass-key on your cell phone when
prompted in its discovery mode.
To get your phone into its
discovery mode, refer to the
phone’s operation manual.
CONTINUED
427
08/07/29 18:47:37 31TK4600 0433 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
NOTE: If you want to cancel the
pairing process at this point, press
ENTER to select ‘‘Cancel,’’ or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Cancel.’’
5. When the pass-key is transferred
to HFL, it recognizes and pairs
your cell phone. HFL
automatically attempts to connect
to your cell phone that has just
been paired.
6. The notification is displayed. If OK,
press ENTER. Then the message
‘‘Now your phone is ready for
hands-free calls’’ appears. If you
want to pair two or more phones,
repeat steps 2−4.
428
NOTE: The navigation system can
manage up to six phones. If you
attempt to pair a seventh phone, a
screen message will appear,
prompting you to delete one of your
existing phones.
08/07/29 18:47:45 31TK4600 0434 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Features
Rotate the interface dial to select
‘‘Yes’’ and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
display changes to the deleting
procedure. To delete a phone, see
page 431 . When the phone is
deleted, you can pair the seventh
(now sixth) phone to the system.
Specifying the Bluetooth Pass-key
HFL uses a Bluetooth pass-key to
pair a cellular phone. By default, the
system generates and uses a random
pass-key for any Bluetooth
connection. You can change this
setting to the fixed pass-key. Do the
following.
1. Select the Cellular Phone screen,
then move the interface selector
down. Rotate the dial to select
‘‘Setup Bluetooth Phone’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Setup Bluetooth
Phone.’’ HFL responds ‘‘Please
select a Bluetooth Phone item to
setup.’’
2. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Pass-key’’
and press ENTER, or press the
Talk button and say ‘‘Pass-key.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Would you like to
setup a random or fixed Passkey?’’
CONTINUED
429
08/07/29 18:47:53 31TK4600 0435 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Example
3. Rotate the dial to select either
‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random.’’
When selecting ‘‘Random’’
The navigation system generates
and uses a random pass-key for
subsequent phone pairing.
HFL returns to the Setup Bluetooth
phone screen.
430
When selecting ‘‘Fixed’’
Specify a 4-digit number in the passkey entry screen and move the
interface selector down. The
specified number will be generated
and used for subsequent phone
pairing.
HFL responds ‘‘Please say your 4digit pass-key.’’
Refer to the navigation system
manual for information on how to
enter numbers.
08/07/29 18:48:03 31TK4600 0436 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To delete a paired phone
LIST NUMBER
Features
The list number 1 is selected.
If you would like to delete a phone,
do the following.
1. Select the Cellular Phone screen,
then move the interface selector
down. Rotate the dial to select
‘‘Setup Bluetooth Phone’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Setup Bluetooth
Phone.’’ HFL responds ‘‘Please
select a Bluetooth Phone item to
setup.’’
2. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Delete a
phone’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Delete a phone.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number of the
phone to delete from the list.’’
3. Rotate the dial to select the phone
you want to delete from the list,
and press ENTER. Move the
interface selector down for ‘‘OK.’’
You can also press the Talk button
and say the list number of the
phone you want to delete, then say
‘‘OK.’’
CONTINUED
431
08/07/29 18:48:10 31TK4600 0437 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone
You can change to another phone
when there are multiple paired
phones.
1. Activate the Discovery mode of
the Bluetooth-compatible phone
you would like to link.
4. The above screen is displayed.
Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Yes’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Yes.’’
432
2. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
08/07/29 18:48:18 31TK4600 0438 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
3. Move the interface selector down
to select the ‘‘Phone setup’’ screen,
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the phone setup
item.’’
Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Search
for next phone’’ and press ENTER,
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Search for next phone.’’
HFL attempts to connect with
another paired phone, and the
message ‘‘Searching for a Bluetooth
phone’’ appears.
For more information on how to
select the power mode, see page 178 .
If the above screen is displayed,
pairing has finished.
CONTINUED
433
Features
Making a Call
You can make calls using any phone
number or by using a name in the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial
from an incoming or outgoing
number. During a call, HFL allows
you to talk up to 30 minutes after you
set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK). Continuing a call
without running the power system
may discharge and weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
08/07/29 18:48:27 31TK4600 0439 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To make a call by dialing a number, do
this:
Example
1. With your phone on and the power
mode in ACCESSORY or ON,
press the INFO button.
For more information on how to
select the power mode, see page
178 .
2. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Cellular
Phone’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Cellular Phone.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Which cellular phone item would
you like to select?’’
434
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Dial’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Dial.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please say the cellular
phone number continuously.’’
4. Rotate the dial and press ENTER
to select each number, or press
the Talk button and say the entire
number as a continuous string.
For example, say ‘‘123-456-7890.’’
If the wrong number is displayed
on the screen, press the Talk
button again and say ‘‘Delete’’ or
‘‘Clear.’’ All digits will be cleared.
08/07/29 18:48:35 31TK4600 0440 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To delete a number with the
interface dial, move the selector to
the left and release it. To delete all
the numbers in one go, move the
selector to the left and hold it.
Example
7. To end the call, rotate the dial to
select ‘‘Hang-up’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Hang-Up
button on the steering wheel.
Features
NOTE: To enter a pound (#), say
‘‘pound.’’ To enter a star (*), say
‘‘star.’’
On the screen, move the interface
selector to the right to select a pound
or star.
5. When you have finished, press the
Pick-Up button on the steering
wheel or move the interface
selector down to make the call, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Dial.’’ HFL responds ‘‘Dialing.’’
6. HFL Calling display appears,
notifying you that the system is
dialing the entered phone number.
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob or the steering wheel
volume controls.
CONTINUED
435
08/07/29 18:48:43 31TK4600 0441 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To make a call using a name in the HFL
phonebook, do this:
LIST NUMBER
1. With your phone on and the power
mode in ACCESSORY or ON,
press the INFO button.
For more information on how to
select the power mode, see page
178 .
2. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Cellular
Phone’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Cellular Phone.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Which cellular phone item would
you like to select?’’
436
The list number 1 is selected.
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Phone
Book’’ and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Phone
Book.’’ If a phonebook has already
been imported, HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number of the
phonebook from the list.’’ If a
phonebook has not been imported,
HFL will attempt to import it from
your phone (see page 455 ).
4. Rotate the dial to select a contact
name and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say the list
number of the name you want to
select. HFL responds ‘‘Please
select the number of the phone
number from the list.’’
08/07/29 18:48:51 31TK4600 0442 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
List Number
Selected Name
7. HFL Calling display appears,
notifying you that the system is
dialing the entered phone number.
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob or the steering wheel
volume controls.
8. To end the call, rotate the dial to
select ‘‘Hang-up’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Hang-Up
button on the steering wheel.
Features
5. Select the person’s phone number
from the ‘‘Select a number to call’’
screen, or press the Talk button
and say the list number of the
phone number you want to select.
6. Press the Pick-Up button on the
steering wheel or press ENTER to
make the call, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Dial.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Dialing.’’
NOTE: On the ‘‘Select a name’’
screen, move the interface selector
down to select ‘‘Search Phone Book,’’
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Search Phone Book.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please spell a keyword one letter at
a time.’’ Use the interface dial to
enter the keyword. After the
keyword for the name is entered,
move the interface selector down to
return to the ‘‘Select a name’’ screen.
CONTINUED
437
08/07/29 18:49:00 31TK4600 0443 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To make a call using the Call History, do
this:
HISTORY LIST
The HFL stores the last 30 incoming,
the last 30 outgoing, and the last 30
missed calls, including the party
name or phone number and call date.
NOTE: If you have made multiple
calls to the same number, only the
last call to that number will be
recorded. For incoming calls, the call
log also records missed calls.
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
438
2. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Call
History’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Call History.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number of the
call from the history list.’’
3. Move the interface selector
sideways to switch between ‘‘All,’’
‘‘Dial,’’ ‘‘Received,’’ or ‘‘Missed’’
call lists, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘All,’’ ‘‘Dial,’’ ‘‘Received,’’
or ‘‘Missed call.’’ HFL responds
for Dial ‘‘Please select the number
of the dialed call from the history
list’’, and for Received ‘‘Please
select the number of the received
call from the history list.’’
08/07/29 18:49:07 31TK4600 0444 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
4. Rotate the dial to scroll through
each list and select the party name
or phone number by pressing
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say the list number of the call
record you want to select.
6. HFL Calling display appears,
notifying you that the system is
dialing the entered phone number.
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob or the steering wheel
volume controls.
NOTE: You can delete all call history
when you move the interface
selector down when ‘‘All’’ is selected
on the call history screen, or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Delete all.’’
Features
5. Press the Pick-Up button on the
steering wheel, or press ENTER
to make the call.
7. To end the call, rotate the dial to
select ‘‘Hang-up’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Hang-Up
button on the steering wheel.
When the confirmation screen is
displayed, rotate the dial to select
‘‘Yes’’ and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Yes.’’
CONTINUED
439
08/07/29 18:49:16 31TK4600 0445 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To make a call using a Speed Dial, do
this:
SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON
SPEED DIAL LIST ICON
Refer to page 443 for setting.
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
VOICE TAG ICON
2. Rotate the dial to select a desired
name with a speed dial phone icon
and press ENTER, or press the
Talk button and say ‘‘Call’’ and
then the voice tag you stored for
the number you want to call.
440
3. If you want to select a registered
Speed Dial phone number other
than the four entries viewable on
the Cellular Phone screen, select
‘‘More Speed Dial’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘More Speed Dial.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please select the
number of the Speed Dial from the
list.’’
08/07/29 18:49:23 31TK4600 0446 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
4. Rotate the dial to select a list
number and press ENTER, or, if
the number has a voice tag (voice
tag icon is shown), press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Call’’ and then the
voice tag you stored.
5. HFL starts dialing the selected
number. HFL Calling screen is
displayed. Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob or the
steering wheel volume controls.
6. To end the call, rotate the dial to
select ‘‘Hang-up’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Hang-Up
button on the steering wheel.
Receiving a Call
If you receive a call when you are not
on the phone, the HFL incoming call
screen appears. To answer the call,
press the Pick-Up button on the
steering wheel and begin speaking.
If you don’t want to answer the call,
press the Hang-Up button.
If your phone has Call Waiting and
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the
Pick-Up button to answer it. When
you do this, the original call is placed
on hold. To return to the original call,
press the Pick-Up button again. If
you don’t want to answer the new
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the Hang-Up button.
441
Features
VOICE TAG ICON
NOTE: When you select a ‘‘No
entry’’ field, HFL prompts you to
enter a phone number from your
phonebook or call history. See
‘‘Editing the Speed-Dial Numbers’’
for details (page 443 ).
08/07/29 18:49:33 31TK4600 0447 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Transferring a Call
During a call, you can transfer the
call from HFL to your phone, or
from your phone to HFL.
To transfer a call from HFL to your
phone, do this:
When you are on the Calling screen,
rotate the dial to select ‘‘Transfer’’
and press ENTER. The call switches
from HFL to the phone.
Muting a Call
During a call, you can mute or
unmute your voice to the person you
are talking to.
To transfer a call from your phone to
HFL, do this:
When you are on the call and the
Calling screen is displayed, rotate
the dial to select ‘‘Transfer’’ and
press ENTER. The call switches
from your phone to HFL.
To mute your voice, do this:
When you are on the Calling screen,
rotate the dial to select ‘‘Mute’’ and
press ENTER. HFL responds ‘‘Mute
is active.’’
442
08/07/29 18:49:41 31TK4600 0448 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To unmute your voice, do this:
When you are on the Calling screen,
rotate the dial to select ‘‘Mute’’ and
press ENTER. HFL responds ‘‘Mute
is canceled.’’
Storing the Speed Dial Numbers
You can store Speed Dial numbers in
both the ‘‘Phone Setup’’ screen and
the ‘‘Cellular Phone’’ screen.
Storing the Speed Dial Number in the
‘‘Phone Setup’’ Screen
You can store a maximum of 20
numbers in ‘‘Phone Setup.’’
Features
Editing the Speed Dial Numbers
Speed Dial allows you to store up
to 20 phone numbers, four of
which are accessible on the
‘‘Cellular Phone’’ screen for quick
access. They can be chosen and
copied from your phonebook and
call history. You can also clear and
change a Speed Dial number.
SPEED DIAL NUMBER
CONTINUED
443
08/07/29 18:49:49 31TK4600 0449 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
SPEED DIAL NUMBER
LIST NUMBER
1. Select Cellular Phone screen, then
move the interface selector down.
Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Edit
Speed Dial’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Edit speed dial’’ after the beep.
HFL responds ‘‘Please select a
method to edit.’’
444
2. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Store
Speed Dial’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Store Speed Dial.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number to
register from the list.’’
3. Rotate the dial to select a speed
dial number and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say the
list number of Speed Dial you want
to store. HFL responds ‘‘Would
you like to register the Speed Dial
from Phonebook or Call history?’’
08/07/29 18:49:58 31TK4600 0450 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
▼
Features
LIST NUMBER
4. Rotate the dial to select
‘‘Phonebook’’ or ‘‘Call history’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Phonebook’’ or
‘‘Call history.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number of the
name from the list’’ when
‘‘Phonebook’’ is selected, and
‘‘Please select the number of the
call from the history list’’ when
‘‘Call history’’ is selected.
5. When ‘‘Phonebook’’ is selected,
rotate the dial to select a name
from the list, or press the Talk
button and say the list number of
the phone number you want to
store. HFL responds ‘‘Please
select the number of the phone
number from the list.’’
When ‘‘Call history’’ is selected,
rotate the dial to select a phone
number or contact name from a
list of dialed numbers or received
calls, or press the Talk button and
say a list number of the contact
you want to store.
NOTE: The call history only records
dialed, received, or missed phone
numbers from HFL, not the phone.
CONTINUED
445
08/07/29 18:50:06 31TK4600 0451 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
6. When storage of the Speed Dial
number is completed, the
following screen is displayed.
If you want to record a Voice Tag
for the selected speed dial number,
rotate the dial to select ‘‘Yes’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Yes.’’ See page
450 .
446
Storing the Speed Dial Number in the
‘‘Cellular Phone’’ Screen
If any Speed Dial number is set up in
‘‘Phone Setup,’’ numbers 1 through 4
are displayed in the ‘‘Cellular Phone’’
screen. If there is a blank, ‘‘No
entry’’ is displayed. You can store a
Speed Dial number directly from the
‘‘Cellular Phone’’ screen.
1. Rotate the dial to select a blank
(No Entry) in the ‘‘Cellular Phone’’
screen and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say the list
number of the Speed Dial you
want to store. HFL responds
‘‘Would you like to register the
speed dial from the Phonebook or
Call history?’’
08/07/29 18:50:15 31TK4600 0452 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
▼
Features
LIST NUMBER
2. Rotate the dial to select
‘‘Phonebook’’ or ‘‘Call history’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Phonebook’’ or
‘‘Call history.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number of the
name from the list’’ when
‘‘Phonebook’’ is selected, and
‘‘Please select the number of the
call from the history list’’ when
‘‘Call history’’ is selected.
3. When ‘‘Phonebook’’ is selected,
rotate the dial to select a name
from the list, or press the Talk
button and say the list number of
the phone number you want to
store. HFL responds ‘‘Please
select the number of the phone
number from the list.’’
When ‘‘Call history’’ is selected,
rotate the dial to select a phone
number or contact name from a
list of your dialed numbers or
received calls, or press the Talk
button and say the number of the
name or number you want to store.
NOTE: The call history only records
dialed, received, or missed phone
numbers from HFL, not the phone.
CONTINUED
447
08/07/29 18:50:21 31TK4600 0453 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
4. When storage of the Speed Dial
number is completed, the
following screen is displayed.
Deleting Speed Dial Numbers
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
If you want to record a Voice Tag to
the stored Speed Dial number, rotate
the dial to select ‘‘Yes’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Yes.’’ See page 450 .
448
08/07/29 18:50:29 31TK4600 0454 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
Features
2. Move the interface selector down
to select ‘‘Phone Setup,’’ or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Phone
Setup.’’ Rotate the dial to select
‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Edit Speed Dial.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please select a method
to edit.’’
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Delete
Speed Dial’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Delete Speed Dial.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please select the
number from the list to delete.’’
4. Rotate the dial to select the entry
you want to delete from the list.
Press ENTER, and move the
interface selector down for ‘‘OK.’’
You can also press the Talk button,
say the list number to delete, and
say ‘‘OK.’’
CONTINUED
449
08/07/29 18:50:36 31TK4600 0455 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Storing a Voice Tag
TRASH ICON
5. The selected entry will be
highlighted and a trash icon will
appear next to it. Move the
interface selector down, or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘OK’’ to
delete the entry.
450
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
2. Move the interface selector down
to select ‘‘Phone Setup,’’ or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Phone
Setup.’’ Rotate the dial to select
‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Edit Speed Dial.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please select a method
to edit.’’
08/07/29 18:50:44 31TK4600 0456 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
ENTRY
Features
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Store
Voice Tag’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Store Voice Tag.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number of the
speed dial to register the voice tag.’’
4. Rotate the dial to select the entry
you want to store a voice tag for,
press ENTER, and move the
interface selector down for ‘‘OK.’’
You can also press the Talk button,
say the list number of the entry
you want to store a voice tag for,
and say ‘‘OK.’’
5. The above message will appear.
Press the Talk button on the
steering wheel and say the voice
tag name (for example, ‘‘Mike’’)
CONTINUED
451
08/07/29 18:50:52 31TK4600 0457 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
6. When the system can recognize
the voice tag, the following screen
is displayed.
NOTE: The system will return to
step 5 if the voice tag name is not
recognized.
If the voice tag name or similarsounding one is already stored, the
message ‘‘This voice tag already
exists. Please say a different name’’
will be displayed.
HFL will say ‘‘Do you want to store
Voice tag Mike for this number?’’
Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No’’ and press ENTER, or press the
Talk button and say ‘‘Yes.’’ When
you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the voice tag is
stored. You will see the voice tag
icon on the Speed Dial entry.
452
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
HFL will be able to better
recognize multisyllabic name
entries (‘‘Peter’’ instead of ‘‘Pete’’),
or a longer name (‘‘John Smith’’
instead of ‘‘John’’).
Use a consistent, even tone and
reduce background noise when
storing names, as the HFL voice
recognition can be sensitive.
08/07/29 18:51:02 31TK4600 0458 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Deleting a Voice Tag
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
Features
Using a Voice Tag
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
2. Press the Talk button, and say
‘‘Call’’ and the Voice Tag right
after it.
3. HFL starts dialing the phone
number associated with the Voice
Tag. HFL Calling screen is
displayed. Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers.
4. To end the call, rotate the dial to
select ‘‘Hang-up’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Hang-Up
button on the steering wheel.
2. Move the interface selector down
to select ‘‘Phone Setup,’’ or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Phone
Setup.’’ Rotate the dial to select
‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Edit Speed Dial.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please select a method
to edit.’’
CONTINUED
453
08/07/29 18:51:10 31TK4600 0459 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
SELECTED ENTRY
VOICE TAG ICON
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Delete
Voice Tag’’ and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say
‘‘Delete Voice Tag.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the number of the
voice tag to delete.’’
454
4. Rotate the dial to select the entry
that you want to delete the voice
tag for and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say the list
number of entry to delete.
5. The selected entry will be
highlighted. Move the interface
selector down, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘OK’’ to delete the
entry’s voice tag.
08/07/29 18:51:21 31TK4600 0460 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit www.acura.
com/handsfreelink or call the
HandsFreeLink consumer
support at 1-888-528-7876. In
Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
1-888-9-ACURA-9. You can see
your phone’s owner’s manual for
information.
To Import the Cellular Phonebook
Hands-free calls are more convenient
if you import the phonebook from
your phone to HFL.
For safety purposes, only perform
this function while the vehicle is
stopped.
Features
Setting Up the Cellular Phone
Book
HFL can store up to six phones,
with one phonebook for each. The
Phonebook allows you to store up
to 1,000 names and 10,000 phone
numbers. The maximum names
and numbers to be stored varies
on the data size of each saved item.
Once they are stored, you can
then automatically dial any name
or number in the phonebook.
NOTE: Once HFL starts importing
from the phone, it does not accept
phone-related operations until the
process is finished.
1. Pair your phone to HFL (see page
426 ).
2. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
3. Move the interface selector down
to select the ‘‘Phone setup’’ screen,
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the phone setup
item.’’
4. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Import
Cellular Phonebook’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Import Cellular
Phonebook.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Would you like to import Cellular
Phonebook?’’
CONTINUED
455
08/07/29 18:51:28 31TK4600 0461 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
NOTE: If you are playing Bluetooth
Audio, the above screen is displayed.
If you want to stop Bluetooth Audio
and continue to import the Cellular
Phonebook, rotate the dial to select
‘‘Yes’’ and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Yes.’’
456
The Phonebook data is being
imported when the above screen is
displayed.
5. If the import is successful, you will
see the above screen. Press
ENTER to select ‘‘OK,’’ and the
screen will return to the ‘‘Cellular
Phone.’’
NOTE: After returning to the
‘‘Cellular Phone’’ screen, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Phonebook’’ and press
ENTER. Make sure the phonebook
was imported successfully.
08/07/29 18:51:35 31TK4600 0462 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
When you update information in
your cell phone’s phonebook, you
will need to repeat the import
process.
You may not be able to store the
maximum number of names and
numbers in some cases.
Up to three category icons are
displayed in the right side of the list.
These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the
person. If a name has more than
three category icons, ‘‘ - - - ’’ is
displayed.
The following category icons will
appear:
Work
Pager
Features
NOTE:
HFL stores up to 10,000 phone
numbers for each paired phone. If
you try to import a phonebook
with more than 10,000 numbers,
or phonebook with no numbers at
all, a screen message will notify
you that data cannot be imported.
Fax
Preference
Car
Home
Other
Mobile
CONTINUED
457
08/09/04 18:13:03 31TK4600 0463 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To Delete the Imported Phonebook
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
2. Move the interface selector down
to select the ‘‘Phone setup’’ screen,
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the phone setup
item.’’
458
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Delete
Cellular Phonebook’’ and press
ENTER, or press the Talk button
and say ‘‘Delete Cellular
Phonebook.’’ HFL responds ‘‘This
will delete the imported
Phonebook for the currently
selected phone. Would you like to
continue?’’
4. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Yes’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Yes.’’
08/07/29 18:51:52 31TK4600 0464 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Features
Setting the User
HFL can store up to six users. Each
user has their own Phonebook,
Speed Dial, and Call history. You can
rename and delete a user name in
the ‘‘Edit User’’ screen. You can also
set a 4-digit PIN (password) to
protect user information.
Store a user name
5. When the imported phonebook is
deleted, the above screen is
displayed.
Only the phonebook for the
selected user will be deleted.
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
2. Move the interface selector down
to select the ‘‘Phone setup’’ screen,
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the phone setup
item.’’
CONTINUED
459
08/07/29 18:51:59 31TK4600 0465 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Edit
4. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Name’’
User’’ and press ENTER, or press
and press ENTER, or press the
the Talk button and say ‘‘Edit User.’’
Talk button and say ‘‘Name.’’ HFL
HFL responds ‘‘Please select an
responds ‘‘Please select the
edit user item.’’
number of user name to edit from
the list.’’
460
5. Rotate the dial to select the phone
that you want to create a user
name for, press ENTER, and move
the interface selector down for
‘‘OK.’’ You can also press the Talk
button, say the list number of the
phone you want to create a user
name for and say ‘‘OK.’’
08/07/29 18:52:07 31TK4600 0466 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Delete a user name
6. Rotate the dial and press ENTER
to select the letters. After the new
name is entered, move the
interface selector down to create
the user name.
2. Move the interface selector down
to select the ‘‘Phone setup’’ screen,
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the phone setup
item.’’
Features
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Edit
User’’ and press ENTER, or press
the Talk button and say ‘‘Edit User.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Please select an
edit user item.’’
CONTINUED
461
08/07/29 18:52:16 31TK4600 0467 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
4. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Delete’’
and press ENTER, or press the
Talk button and say ‘‘Delete.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please select the
number of user name to edit from
the list.’’
ENTRY
5. Rotate the dial to select the entry
that you want to delete the user
name for and press ENTER, or
press the Talk button and say the
list number of the entry to delete.
SELECTED ENTRY
6. The selected entry will be
highlighted. Move the interface
selector down, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘OK,’’ to delete
the name.
NOTE: If you delete the user name,
the user name will be ‘‘No name.’’
462
08/07/29 18:52:23 31TK4600 0468 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To add, change, or remove a PIN
(password) from any user
2. Move the interface selector down
to select the ‘‘Phone setup’’ screen,
or press the Talk button and say
‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL responds
‘‘Please select the phone setup
item.’’
Features
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
dial to select ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ and
press ENTER, or press the Talk
button and say ‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
HFL responds ‘‘Which cellular
phone item would you like to
select?’’
3. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘Edit
4. Rotate the dial to select ‘‘PIN’’ and
User’’ and press ENTER, or press
press ENTER, or press the Talk
the Talk button and say ‘‘Edit User.’’
button and say ‘‘PIN.’’ HFL
HFL responds ‘‘Please select an
responds ‘‘Please select the
edit user item.’’
number of user to setup from the
list.’’
CONTINUED
463
08/07/29 18:52:31 31TK4600 0469 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
LIST NUMBER
5. Rotate the dial to select the user
that you want to set a PIN for,
press ENTER, and move the
interface selector down for ‘‘OK.’’
You can also press the Talk button,
say the list number of the user you
want to set a PIN for, and say the
number, then ‘‘OK.’’ HFL
responds ‘‘Please say your 4-digit
PIN.’’
464
NOTE: If the user you selected has
already set a PIN, the ‘‘Enter
password’’ screen will be displayed.
Enter the PIN which is already set.
7. You will need to re-enter the
same 4 digits for confirmation.
Move the interface selector
down when you are done.
6. Rotate the dial and press ENTER
to select 4 digits to set as the PIN.
Move the interface selector down
when you are done.
08/07/29 18:52:39 31TK4600 0470 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Changing a User
USER
SPEED DIAL LIST
Features
NOTE: If you choose not to use a
PIN, move the interface selector
down in step 6 to select ‘‘DO NOT
USE PIN’’ without entering the 4digit password.
You can change a user in the
‘‘Cellular Phone’’ screen. To select a
user, move the interface selector
right or left.
If you switch to a user with a PIN,
the ‘‘Speed Dial’’ list on the right side
of the screen will not appear until the
PIN is entered.
When you select ‘‘Call history,’’
‘‘Phone Book,’’ ‘‘Dial,’’ or ‘‘More
Speed Dial,’’ the ‘‘Enter PIN’’ screen
will be displayed. Enter the password.
465
08/07/29 18:52:45 31TK4600 0471 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Limitations
While you are listening to the
Bluetooth audio, pause the system
to operate HFL.
U.S. models only
In addition, you cannot use HFL
while using AcuraLink.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
466
08/07/29 18:52:54 31TK4600 0472 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
On models with navigation system
Operating tips and information on
your vehicle’s features.
Important recall and safety
information.
Maintenance information to keep
your vehicle in top condition.
Interface Dial
Most AcuraLink functions are
controlled by the interface dial. The
interface dial has two parts, a knob
and a selector.
CANCEL BUTTON
ENTER
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.
Features
AcuraLink enhances your ownership
experience by providing a direct
communication link between your
vehicle and the Acura Server.
Working through the XM radio
satellite, AcuraLink works in
conjunction with the navigation
system, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL), and audio system in your
vehicle. It displays and receives
several kinds of messages, including:
KNOB
INTERFACE DIAL
SELECTOR
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
Diagnostic information to provide
information about any problems
with your vehicle.
467
08/07/29 18:53:03 31TK4600 0473 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To view previously read messages:
Reading Messages
If you have new messages, an
envelope icon appears in the lower
left hand part of the navigation
screen.
A list of all messages will be shown.
New Messages will be at the top.
Select the message you want to read
by pressing ENTER.
To open a message:
Press ENTER on the interface
selector, then select New Message
from the navigation system map
menu.
468
A red exclamation will be marked on
an envelope icon with an important
message.
Press the INFO button. The
information screen will be shown.
08/07/29 18:53:12 31TK4600 0474 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Unread messages have a closed
envelope icon next to them. The icon
disappears when it has already been
read.
Message Options
Select ‘‘Messages’’, then select a
message category by pressing
ENTER. Select the message you
want to read and press ENTER.
After purchasing your vehicle,
messages may not appear
immediately.
Your dealer has to register the
vehicle identification before you can
receive messages. This can take
several days to process.
Features
NOTE: Only Diagnostic Info
messages appear on the navigation
screen while driving. They indicate if
your vehicle has a problem that may
need immediate attention (see page
478 ).
When you open a message, you can
read a summary of it, and then
choose one of several options. If an
option is not available for a message,
that option will not be highlighted.
CONTINUED
469
08/07/29 18:53:20 31TK4600 0475 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Delete − Select this option to delete
the current message.
Voice − Select this option to hear a
voice read the entire message. This
gives you more information than the
screen can display at one time. When
you select the Voice option, it
changes to a Stop Reading option.
Select the option again to stop the
voice.
Call − Select this option to call a
phone number embedded in the
message. When you select Call, the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
dials the number for you.
To make a call, your Bluetooth
compatible phone must be paired to
the vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system,
powered on, and located within the
vehicle (see page 426 ).
470
Find Nearest Dealer − Select this
option to find the nearest Acura
dealer using the navigation system.
Call Your Dealer − Select this
option to call the Acura dealer you
purchased your vehicle from.
AcuraLink also directs you to this
dealer so you can schedule a
maintenance appointment or receive
information about a message. If your
assigned servicing dealer changes,
AcuraLink will reset to call that
dealer.
Diagnostic Info − Select this
option to get more information about
the current diagnostic message. To
use this option, your cellphone must
be paired with the HFL. In addition,
the paired phone must have a
compatible data service and be set
up with the AcuraLink system to
make a data connection. Access the
handsfreelink.com website to find
out which data services are currently
compatible with AcuraLink.
Message Preferences
To set your AcuraLink preferences
(the types of messages you want to
receive, if any), visit the My Acura
website at www.owners.acura.com, and
choose what you would like to
receive. If you do not have internet
access, call Acura Client Services at
(800) 382-2238; they can set your
message preferences for you.
08/07/29 18:53:30 31TK4600 0476 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Deleting Messages
NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/
campaign messages can only be
deleted by your dealer.
To delete a single message:
Press the INFO button to bring up
the Information screen.
Select the message category that
contains the message you want to
delete.
NOTE: The Delete All Messages
command does not apply to
Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.
They can only be deleted by your
dealer.
Press the SETUP button to view
the setup screen.
Select Other by pushing the
interface selector to the right.
Use the interface knob to scroll to
the AcuraLink/Messages option,
and select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
Scroll to the Delete Messages
option, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to the category with the
messages you want to delete, and
select the category by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Use the interface knob to scroll up
or down to the message title you
want to delete, and select it by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface
knob, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
471
Features
Scroll to the Messages option,
then select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
To delete all messages:
08/07/29 18:53:38 31TK4600 0477 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Message Categories
There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Guide, Maintenance Minder,
Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
and Scheduled Dealer Appointment.
The system can store up to 255
messages.
Quick Tips
Feature Guide
These messages, based on updated
vehicle information and comments
from other TL owners, supplement
your Owner’s Manual and Quick
Start Guide. They provide you with
relevant information for a safe and
enjoyable ownership experience. For
additional information, call Acura
Client Services directly through the
HFL.
During the first 90 days of
ownership, one of up to 17 different
messages appears each day. These
messages help you to use and
understand the features of your
vehicle.
Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.
472
08/07/29 18:53:48 31TK4600 0478 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Maintenance Minder
You can use the following message
options:
Make an appointment from the
schedule at the dealer.
Call your dealer for an
appointment.
Find the nearest dealer.
These messages provide detailed
information about the service
needed for your vehicle. When a
maintenance message appears on
the multi-information display, a list of
needed maintenance items is
provided through an AcuraLink
message. These messages tell you
the exact maintenance needed,
helping you to avoid unnecessary
maintenance costs.
To use the automated appointment
function, you should visit the My
Acura website at
www.owners.acura.com, register some
required settings, and complete the
Phone-Data Connection set-up (see
page 481 ). Your Bluetooth
compatible phone should also be
paired and linked to your vehicle’s
Bluetooth HFL (see page 426 ).
CONTINUED
473
Features
Reschedule the appointment with
the dealer.
Automated Appointment
You can make an appointment with
your dealer through the AcuraLink
when you receive a maintenance
minder message.
08/07/29 18:53:54 31TK4600 0479 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you an appropriate
appointment date and time on the
navigation screen. If you accept this
appointment, select ‘‘Confirm
Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.
When you see the maintenance
minder message on the multiinformation display, you will also
receive a message in the navigation
screen. Select ‘‘AcuraLink/
Messages’’ on the Setup screen, then
press ENTER.
474
Select the received message, then
press ENTER. You will see the
message as shown. To make an
appointment, select ‘‘Schedule
Dealer Appt.’’ then press ENTER.
08/07/29 18:54:03 31TK4600 0480 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Scheduled Dealer Appointment
To reschedule the appointment:
You will see the screen to reschedule
as shown. To make an appointment,
select ‘‘Reschedule Appointment,’’
then press ENTER.
Features
The confirmation message will be
displayed on the screen. Make sure
to confirm the appointment date,
time and dealer. If it is OK, press
ENTER.
If you want to change or reschedule
the appointment date, select ‘‘Cancel,’’
then press ENTER.
Select ‘‘AcuraLink/Messages’’ on
the Setup screen, then press ENTER.
Select ‘‘Scheduled Dealer
Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.
The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you a new appointment date
and time on the navigation screen. If
you accept this appointment, select
‘‘Confirm Appointment,’’ then press
ENTER.
CONTINUED
475
08/07/29 18:54:10 31TK4600 0481 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To cancel the appointment:
Select ‘‘AcuraLink/Messages’’ on
the Setup screen, then press ENTER.
Select the appointment message
then press ENTER. You will see the
screen to cancel as shown. To cancel
the appointment, select ‘‘Cancel
Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.
476
The system will request you to
confirm the cancel on the navigation
screen. To cancel the appointment,
select ‘‘YES,’’ then press ENTER. If
you select ‘‘NO,’’ the screen goes
back to the previous message display.
The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you the confirmation on the
navigation screen. If you accept the
cancel, press ENTER.
08/07/29 18:54:18 31TK4600 0482 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
If you select the cancel appointment,
you cannot try to reschedule the
appointment. If you want to change
or reschedule the appointment date,
call your dealer directly with the
HFL.
Using automated appointment, your
registered dealer through My Acura
is automatically selected. If you want
to select another dealer, such as in
case of an emergency, find the
nearest dealer and call the dealer
directly with the HFL.
Recall/Campaigns
Features
When a maintenance appointment is
due soon, you will also receive an
appointment reminder message.
If your vehicle is affected by a recall
or other important safety
information, a letter will be mailed to
you about the issue and how to fix it.
If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,
you will also receive a reminder
message through AcuraLink. You
can then use the message options to
call your dealer for an appointment
or to find the nearest dealer.
CONTINUED
477
08/07/29 18:54:25 31TK4600 0483 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
For this reason, it is important that
we retain your current phone
number. Please update your
information using My Acura at
www.owners.acura.com.
Diagnostic Info
When an indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MultiInformation Display (MID),
AcuraLink can provide information
about the cause of the indicator or
message and the recommended
action to address it. This helps you
handle the problem as it occurs,
preventing or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot
determine some mechanical
problems (such as squeaks or
rattles) that are not triggered by the
diagnostic indicator monitors.
For more information on the
instrument panel indicators, see page
64 .
When any indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MID,
AcuraLink immediately notifies you
with the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.
AcuraLink can help you decide what
to do.’’
If you do not want the information
right away, select the Check Later
option.
478
08/07/29 18:54:35 31TK4600 0484 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
If you want the information now,
select the Check Now option. (If the
navigation screen is not active, you
must select OK from the navigation
disclaimer screen before you can
check the information.)
Reminder Message
You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.
Features
Depending on the severity of the
problem, the message will let you
know if you should see your dealer
immediately or if you can wait until a
later date.
When viewing a diagnostic info
message through the INFO menu,
you can use the Diagnostic Info
option to connect to the Acura server
and retrieve the latest information
regarding the problem.
NOTE: There may not be any
additional information, depending on
the time elapsed since the previous
time you retrieved the information
from the Acura server.
When you make an appointment
through My Acura’s online Schedule
Service Appointment, you can be
reminded in advance about that
appointment through AcuraLink.
If you need to reschedule or cancel
the appointment, see page 475 .
CONTINUED
479
08/07/29 18:54:41 31TK4600 0485 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Turning the Automated Appointment
preference off will disable
appointment notifications in the
vehicle based on appointments
created or changed at My Acura’s
online scheduling website.
Appointments can still be created,
rescheduled, and canceled from the
vehicle; however the appointment
information stored in the vehicle will
not be updated. Any changes to
those appointments should be made
from the My Acura website.
480
AcuraLink/Message Screen
To access the following functions,
press the SETUP option, push the
interface selector to the right to
select Other, then rotate the
interface knob to select AcuraLink/
Messages.
Delete Messages − Select this
option to delete all stored messages
within a category, except for
diagnostic info and recall campaign
messages. These messages can only
be deleted by a certified technician
after the recall is done or the
problem is corrected, or through a
broadcast message from Acura.
08/07/29 18:54:48 31TK4600 0486 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Auto Reading − Select ON to have
the system automatically read each
message to you. Select OFF to
manually select the Voice option
when you want a message read to
you.
Phone-Data Connection − Select
this option to begin the process
required to connect to Acura. This is
used to access the most recent
diagnostic information when a
problem occurs.
Features
New Message Notification −
Select ON if you want to be notified
of new messages (envelope icon
appears on the navigation screen).
Select OFF if you do not want to be
notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the screen).
Messages can still be accessed using
the INFO menu. If you would like to
stop receiving messages, visit the
My Acura website at www.owners.
acura.com to change your messaging
preferences.
NOTE: For the Phone Data
Connection button to be active, you
need a Bluetooth compatible and
enabled cellphone paired to the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).
To complete the data connection
setup, the paired phone must have a
compatible data service.
CONTINUED
481
08/07/29 18:54:53 31TK4600 0487 AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To find more information on
Bluetooth compatible and enabled
cell phones, visit
www.acura.com/handsfreelink or call
the HandsFreeLink consumer
support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada,
visit www.acura.ca, or call 1-888-9ACURA-9.
482
Connect to the Acura Server −
The default setting is prompt. When
a diagnostic info message appears,
and you select the Check Now option,
the system will prompt you before
connecting to the Acura server. If
you do not wish to connect at that
time, select No at the prompt, and
you will see the information from the
onboard database. The ‘‘Auto’’
setting will remove the prompt when
you select the Check Now option and
will automatically connect to the
Acura server. This setting only
applies when you have a Bluetooth
enabled phone that is paired with the
HFL and you have completed the
Phone-Data Connection setup.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
08/09/12 15:58:37 31TK4600 0488 Rearview Camera and Monitor
On models with navigation system
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
REARVIEW
CAMERA
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with your vehicle in the ON mode,
the rearview is shown on the
navigation system screen.
Features
Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
You can adjust the brightness of the
rearview camera image by turning
the interface dial.
The camera brightness cannot be
adjusted by voice control.
Parking guidelines are also included
on the screen.
If the engine has just been started, it
may take a short time for them to
display.
483
08/07/29 18:55:02 31TK4600 0489 484
08/07/29 18:55:05 31TK4600 0490 Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 486
Fuel Recommendation .................. 486
Service Station Procedures .......... 487
Refueling..................................... 487
Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 488
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 489
Oil Check .................................... 490
Engine Coolant Check .............. 491
Fuel Economy ................................ 492
Accessories and Modifications .... 495
Carrying Cargo .............................. 497
485
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
08/07/29 18:55:14 31TK4600 0491 Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
multi-information display indicates
it is needed.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
486
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane of 91 or higher. If this
octane grade is unavailable, regular
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane of 87 or higher may be used
temporarily. The use of regular
unleaded gasoline can cause metallic
knocking noises in the engine and
will result in decreased engine
performance. The long-term use of
regular-grade gasoline can lead to
engine damage.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service.
08/07/29 18:55:22 31TK4600 0492 Service Station Procedures
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
Refueling
Push
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing
the button in the driver’s door (to
open the fuel fill door manually,
see page 598 ).
CONTINUED
487
Before Driving
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station, or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
08/07/29 18:55:30 31TK4600 0493 Service Station Procedures
FUEL FILL CAP
HOLDER
TETHER
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
488
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even
though the tank is not full, there may
be a problem with your vehicle’s fuel
vapor recovery system. The system
helps keep fuel vapor from going
into the atmosphere. Try filling at
another pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the multiinformation display. If the system
still detects an evaporative system
leak after retightening the cap, the
malfunction indicator lamp may
come on (see page 596 ).
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.
08/07/29 18:55:38 31TK4600 0494 Service Station Procedure
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
message, press the INFO button.
Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2. Put your fingers between the front
edge of the hood and the front
grille to locate the hood latch
handle. Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift the hood.
CONTINUED
489
Before Driving
The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 596 .
08/07/29 18:55:48 31TK4600 0495 Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
LATCH
DIPSTICK
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
To close the hood, lower it to about a
foot (30 cm) above the fender, then
press down firmly with your hands.
Make sure the hood is securely
latched.
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
3. Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
up.
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
490
08/07/29 18:55:56 31TK4600 0496 Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
MAX
RESERVE TANK
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 550 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
LOWER MARK
MIN
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 547 .
To access the radiator reserve tank,
remove the right-side engine
compartment cover.
See page 545 for the engine coolant
location.
491
Before Driving
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 543 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
UPPER MARK
08/07/29 18:56:05 31TK4600 0497 Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
492
City MPG
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel
Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit www.
fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
vehicles.gc.ca)
08/07/29 18:56:19 31TK4600 0498 Fuel Economy
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
547).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Drive Efficiently
Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 543 ).
For example:
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
CONTINUED
493
Before Driving
Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
08/07/29 18:56:29 31TK4600 0499 Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
494
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
L per
100 km
08/07/29 18:56:38 31TK4600 0500 Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Acura accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Although non-Acura accessories may
fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 599 ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
495
Before Driving
Accessories
Your dealer has Acura accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
08/07/29 19:02:46 31TK4600 0501 Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with nonAcura components could seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Acura suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a nonAcura suspension kit can affect
the handling and stability.
Non-Acura wheels, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and may not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
496
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
08/09/04 18:13:22 31TK4600 0502 Carrying Cargo
DOOR POCKETS
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Center and side pockets
Console compartment
Trunk
SIDE
POCKET
TRUNK
SEAT-BACK
POCKETS
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
497
Before Driving
In addition, the trunk pass-through
allows you to carry longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, tires, and make it
unsafe. Before carrying any type of
cargo, be sure to read the following
pages.
08/07/29 19:03:06 31TK4600 0503 Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. models
and 395 kg for Canadian models.
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
498
(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
08/07/29 19:03:21 31TK4600 0504 Carrying Cargo
Example 1
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)
Example 3
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
trunk panel. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
CONTINUED
499
Before Driving
Example 2
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
08/07/29 19:03:31 31TK4600 0505 Carrying Cargo
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
Also, keep all cargo below the
bottom of the windows. If it is
higher, it could interfere with the
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Cargo Hook Buttons
CARGO HOOK BUTTON
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 57 .
Cargo hook buttons in the trunk can
be used to install a net for securing
items.
Cargo Nets
If equipped
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
500
08/07/29 19:03:35 31TK4600 0506 Driving
Preparing to Drive ......................... 502
Starting the Engine
(Models without Keyless
Access System) ...................... 503
Starting the Engine
(Models with Keyless
Access System) ...................... 505
Automatic Transmission............... 507
Driving with the Paddle
Shifters ........................................ 512
Super Handling-All Wheel
DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System .... 517
Parking ............................................ 519
Braking System.............................. 520
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 521
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ......... 523
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ......................... 526
Towing a Trailer ............................ 531
Towing Your Vehicle .................... 531
501
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the Super Handling-All
Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) system,
vehicle stability assist (VSA ), aka
electronic stability control (ESC),
system and the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
08/07/29 19:03:45 31TK4600 0507 Preparing to Drive
You should do these checks and
adjustments before you drive your
vehicle:
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
6. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 155 ).
7. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 161 ).
8. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 140 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
3. Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
5. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
502
9. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
10.Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 16 ).
11.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see pages 63 , 75 and
77 ).
08/07/29 19:03:54 31TK4600 0508 Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)
Your vehicle’s starting system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:
seconds until the engine starts.
If you hold the ignition switch in
the START (III) position for more
than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
depending on the outside
temperature, runs for about 10 to
25 seconds until the engine starts.
1. Apply the parking brake.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the
starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 143 .
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
503
Driving
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
08/07/29 19:04:00 31TK4600 0509 Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)
Check Starting System Message
If this message is on, the ignition
switch has to be held in the START
(III) position manually until the
engine starts. The ignition switch
can be held in that position up to 15
seconds.
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your vehicle inspected
by a dealer.
If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON (II) position. You
will also see this message when the
auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.
504
08/07/29 19:04:10 31TK4600 0510 Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)
Your vehicle’s starting system has an
auto control mode. When you have
your keyless access remote and push
the engine start/stop button while
depressing the brake pedal, this
feature keeps the engine’s starter
motor running until the engine starts.
Follow these instructions to start the
engine:
1. Apply the parking brake.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
In either of the following cases, you
should insert the keyless access
remote into the keyless remote slot.
For more information, see pages
186 and 187 .
The keyless access remote system
main switch is off.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, push and release the engine
start/stop button. You do not need
to hold the engine start/stop
button to start the engine.
Depending on the outside
temperature, the starter motor
runs for about 6 to 9 seconds until
the engine starts.
If you hold the engine start/stop
button for more than 7 seconds,
the starter motor, depending on
the outside temperature, runs for
about 10 to 25 seconds until the
engine starts.
If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded keyless access remote (or other
device) is used, the engine’s f uel system
is disabled. For more inf ormation, see
page 143 .
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
CONTINUED
505
Driving
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
The keyless access remote battery
becomes weak or dead.
08/07/29 19:04:21 31TK4600 0511 Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
Check Starting System Message
You will also see this message when
the auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.
If this message is on, you should
press and hold the engine start/stop
button until the engine starts. The
engine start/stop button can be
pressed up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your vehicle inspected
by a dealer.
Your vehicle has the engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch to select the power mode. For
more information, see page 178 .
If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display with the power mode ON.
506
Emergency Engine Start
If you cannot start the engine using
the normal engine start procedure,
do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Put the shift lever into Park.
3. Press the engine start/stop button
to turn on the ACCESSORY mode.
4. Press and hold the engine start/
stop button for about 15 seconds
while pressing the brake pedal.
Do not follow this procedure unless
it is a case of emergency. Even if you
can start the engine using this
method, the system may have a
malfunction. Contact your dealer as
soon as possible.
08/07/29 19:04:30 31TK4600 0512 Automatic Transmission
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
Shift Lever Position Indicators
These indicators between the
tachometer and speedometer show
which position the shift lever is in.
Using a paddle shift mode, the gear
position indicator shows you the
selected gear number (see page
512 ).
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display.
CONTINUED
507
Driving
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR on
PADDLE SHIFT MODE
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
08/07/29 19:04:37 31TK4600 0513 Automatic Transmission
Shifting
RELEASE BUTTON
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal, and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then move the
lever. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
508
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0);
and ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). See
page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to S
S to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
08/07/29 19:04:43 31TK4600 0514 Automatic Transmission
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 510 .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
On models with keyless access system
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Driving
On models without keyless access
system
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you change the power mode
from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
CONTINUED
509
08/07/29 19:04:51 31TK4600 0515 Automatic Transmission
S Position (S) − To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. This position is similar
to D, except only gears from first to
fourth are selected. The S position
keeps the transmission from cycling
between fourth and fifth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
With the shift lever in D or S, you
can also use the paddle shifters to
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal. For more information
on driving with the paddle shifters,
see page 514 .
510
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. On models without keyless access
system
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
On models with keyless access
system
Remove the built-in key from the
keyless access remote (see page
192 ).
08/07/29 19:04:59 31TK4600 0516 Automatic Transmission
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Use a small
flat-tipped screwdriver or metal
fingernail file to carefully pry up
the edge of the cover and remove
it from the slot.
Vehicle without keyless access system
is shown.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Driving
COVER
6. Remove the key or built-in key
from the shift lock release slot,
then reinstall the cover. Make
sure the notch on the cover is on
the rear side. Press the brake
pedal, and restart the engine.
4. Insert a key or built-in key in the
shift lock release slot.
5. Push down on the key or built-in
key while you press the release
button on the shift lever and move
the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
511
08/07/29 19:05:05 31TK4600 0517 Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Downshifting with the paddle shifter
allows you to increase the engine
braking when going down steep or
long hills, and provides more power
when climbing uphills. You can
upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm. Driving in the
higher gear helps fuel economy.
Using the Paddle Shifters in D
position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
When you are driving in D position,
you can shift the transmission up or
down manually with the paddle
shifters.
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
Each time you pull + (right), the
transmission shifts to a higher gear.
Pull − (left) to downshift. You will
see the selected gear number on the
instrument panel.
To shift up or down, use the +
(right) or − (left) paddle shifter on
each side of the steering wheel.
512
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the gear position indicator shows you
the selected gear number.
08/07/29 19:05:15 31TK4600 0518 Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Hold the + paddle shifter for 2
seconds to return to drive mode (D).
When the transmission returns to
drive mode (D), the displayed gear
number disappears.
Each time you pull either paddle
shifter, the transmission shifts one
gear up or down. If you want to shift
up or down more than two gears, pull
the paddle shifter twice, pause, and
then pull it again.
The automatic transmission will not
allow you to shift up or down if:
You downshift before the engine
speed falls below the upper limit of
the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear
position indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to a higher gear.
You upshift before the engine
speed rises above the lower limit
of the higher gear.
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
The transmission downshifts to first
gear and returns to drive mode (D)
when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop or the vehicle speed is
about 9 mph (15 km/h).
If there is a problem in the
transmission while you are driving
with the paddle shifters, the D
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to drive mode
(D).
The transmission remains in the
selected gear if you do not accelerate.
513
Driving
The transmission control system
monitors the accelerator pedal use
and your driving conditions. When
you press the accelerator pedal as in
normal driving, the system judges
that you are driving at a constant
cruising speed without using the
paddle shifters. Under these
conditions, D-paddle shift mode is
canceled, and the transmission
automatically returns to drive mode
(D).
08/07/29 19:05:21 31TK4600 0519 Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in S
position (Sequential Shift Mode)
With the shift lever in S position, you
can manually shift up or down with
the paddle shifters. The
transmission goes into the sequential
shift mode and holds the selected
gear.
To enter the sequential shift mode,
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, move the lever to
the S position, then pull either paddle
shifter. To return to drive mode (D),
move the shift lever to the D position.
While you are driving in the
sequential shift mode, the
transmission will not automatically
return to drive mode (D).
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
‘‘M’’ INDICATOR
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull either
paddle shifter, the gear position
indicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with the
selected gear number.
To upshift, pull the + (right) paddle
shifter. To downshift, pull the −
(left) paddle shifter.
514
When you accelerate from a stop,
the transmission starts in first gear,
and you must manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometer’s red
zone.
08/07/29 19:05:31 31TK4600 0520 Driving with the Paddle Shifters
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
When you are driving in 4th or 5th
gear, the transmission downshifts to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
You press the brake pedal.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed reaches
9 mph (15 km/h) or less.
The automatic transmission will not
allow you to shift up or down if:
You downshift before the engine
speed falls below the upper limit of
the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear
position indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to a higher gear.
If the vehicle speed decreases
below the redline of the selected
lower gear while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission
downshifts, and the indicator
displays the selected gear.
You upshift before the engine
speed rises above the lower limit
of the higher gear.
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
CONTINUED
515
Driving
The vehicle slows down to a
certain speed.
Downshifting with the paddle shifter
allows you to increase the engine
braking when going down steep or
long hills, and provides more power
when climbing uphills. You can
upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm. Driving in the
higher gear helps fuel economy.
08/07/29 19:05:38 31TK4600 0521 Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Here are the speed ranges for
upshifting and downshifting.
To Shift
form
Speed range
1→2
over 0 mph (0 km/h)
2→3
over 9 mph (15 km/h)
3→4
over 17 mph (28 km/h)
4→5
over 38 mph (60 km/h)
To Shift
from
Speed range
5 → 4 under 130 mph (209 km/h)
4→3
under 94 mph (150 km/h)
3→2
under 63 mph (100 km/h)
2→1
under 37 mph (59 km/h)
516
Starting in Second Gear
When you are in sequential shift
mode, and the vehicle is stopped,
pull the + (right) paddle shifter to
shift to second gear. You will see
‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting in
second gear helps to reduce
wheelspin in deep snow or on a
slippery surface.
08/07/29 19:05:45 31TK4600 0522 Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System
If equipped
The super handling-all wheel drive
(SH-AWD) system is a full time allwheel-drive system that
automatically controls and transfers
varying amounts of engine torque to
all wheels independently, according
to the driving conditions.
TORQUE INDICATOR
TORQUE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
The SH-AWD torque distribution
monitor on the multi-information
display shows you the amount of
torque being sent to the wheels.
Each wheel − right front (RF), left
front (LF), right rear (RR), and left
rear (LR) − has its own torque
indicator.
Each torque indicator is displayed as
a bar graph divided into 5 segments.
The number of segments represents
the amount of torque distributed to
each wheel.
When there is only a slight change in
torque distribution while driving,
such as cruising on level roads at the
same speed, the torque distribution
monitor may stop displaying the
amount of torque. This is not a
system problem. The monitor will
show the amount if the system
senses any change in torque
distribution.
CONTINUED
517
Driving
While the SH-AWD system helps to
enhance the vehicle’s driving
stability in all situations, it is still
your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor
08/07/29 19:05:51 31TK4600 0523 Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System
checked.
If the SH-AWD indicator blinks while
driving, it indicates the differential
temperature is too high. You will also
see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF TEMP.
HIGH’’ message on the multiinformation display. If this happens,
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out. If
the indicator does not go out, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
518
If the SH-AWD indicator on the
instrument panel stays on, and the
‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message also appears on the multiinformation display, there is problem
with the SH-AWD system.
Your vehicle still has normal frontwheel drive with vehicle stability
assist (VSA), but does not have the
advantages of SH-AWD. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon
as possible.
08/07/29 19:06:00 31TK4600 0524 Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Lock the doors.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
NOTE: If you are unable to stop the
engine normally while in the Park
position, see Emergency Engine
Stop on page 184 .
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
519
Driving
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
08/07/29 19:06:08 31TK4600 0525 Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
520
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Wear Indicators
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
08/07/29 19:06:15 31TK4600 0526 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
You should never pump the brake pedal.
When the ABS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 597 .
CONTINUED
521
Driving
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
08/07/29 19:06:22 31TK4600 0527 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 597 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
The VSA indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.
522
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.
08/07/29 19:06:33 31TK4600 0528 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output,
and by selectively applying the
brakes.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
When the VSA system indicator
comes on, you will also see a
‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display.
NOTE: The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
With the VSA system indicator on,
you may not be able to stop the
engine even if you park the vehicle
safely. To stop the engine, see
Emergency Engine Stop on page
184 .
CONTINUED
523
Driving
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
VSA Activation Indicator
08/07/29 19:06:41 31TK4600 0529 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on (see page 526 ),
or the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message with the indicator flashing
(see page 529 ), the VSA system
automatically turns on even if the
VSA system is turned off with the
VSA OFF switch. In this case, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
VSA OFF Switch
VSA OFF SWITCH
This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
524
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
08/07/29 19:06:48 31TK4600 0530 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 575 ).
Hill Start Assist
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
This feature starts operating a few
seconds after you are in any drive
gear position (when faced uphill) or
in reverse (when faced downhill).
This feature requires that the
vehicle has come to a complete stop
before it can work.
On models with SH-AWD
Your vehicle is equipped with a hill
start assist feature to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling on steep
inclines as you move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Driving
Hill start assist may not prevent your
vehicle from rolling downhill on a
very steep or slippery slope.
525
08/07/29 19:06:56 31TK4600 0531 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multiinformation display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
526
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
You should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure shown on the driver’s
doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 583 ).
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
08/07/29 19:07:04 31TK4600 0532 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Refer to page 568 for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 529 ).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
in the owner’s manual (see page
570 ).
U.S. model
To select the tire pressure monitor,
press the INFO button several times
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position or with the power mode
ON.
You will see the above display on the
multi-information display when each
tire pressure is normal.
CONTINUED
527
Driving
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
you check and adjust your tire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
08/07/29 19:07:12 31TK4600 0533 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. model
Canadian model
Each tire pressure is shown in PSI
(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian
models).
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
528
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multiinformation display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
Canadian model
If any of the tires has low pressure,
the tire pressure monitor also shows
the above message and each tire
pressure to warn you about the low
tire pressure when you select the
display by pressing the INFO button
several times.
08/07/29 19:07:20 31TK4600 0534 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS System Failure
Canadian model
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the tire pressure monitor shows a
‘‘TPMS ERROR’’ message and the
tire pressure readings are not
displayed. If this happens, you will
first see a system warning message
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ on the
multi-information display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page 526 ).
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
529
Driving
U.S. model
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multiinformation display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page 524 ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
08/07/29 19:07:26 31TK4600 0535 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator and tire
monitor indicator will come on.
Replace the indicated flat tire with
the compact spare tire (see page
583 ).
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
correct.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.
530
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator and the low tire position on
the low tire pressure monitor do not
go out after inflating the tires to the
specified values, have your dealer
check the system as soon as possible.
08/07/29 19:07:32 31TK4600 0536 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
trailer. Attempting to do so can void
your warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page 606 .
Driving
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
531
08/07/29 19:07:35 31TK4600 0537 532
08/07/29 19:07:40 31TK4600 0538 Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the multi-information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
533
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 633 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 534
Maintenance Minder ..................... 535
Fluid Locations............................... 545
Engine Compartment Covers....... 546
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 547
Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 548
Engine Coolant ............................... 550
Windshield Washers ..................... 552
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 553
Brake Fluid ..................................... 555
Lights .............................................. 556
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 564
Floor Mats ...................................... 565
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 566
Wiper Blades .................................. 566
Tires ................................................ 568
Checking the Battery .................... 577
Vehicle Storage .............................. 578
08/07/29 19:07:50 31TK4600 0539 Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
534
down before touching any parts.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
08/07/29 19:07:57 31TK4600 0540 Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the multi-information display to show
you when you should have your
dealer perform engine oil
replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
Engine Oil Life Indicator
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
Maintenance
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
To see the current engine oil life
displayed on the multi-information
display, turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, and press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the engine oil
life is displayed.
CONTINUED
535
08/07/29 19:08:05 31TK4600 0541 Maintenance Minder
The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the multi-information
display according to this table:
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % − 91 %
90 % − 81 %
80 % − 71 %
70 % − 61 %
60 % − 51 %
50 % − 41 %
40 % − 31 %
30 % − 21 %
20 % − 16 %
15 % − 11 %
10 % − 6 %
5%−1%
0%
536
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE (S)
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page 72 ).
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ message along with the
maintenance item code(s) indicating
the main and sub items required at
the time of the oil change. Refer to
page 544 for a complete list of the
maintenance main items and sub
items.
The message appears on the multiinformation display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 19:08:11 31TK4600 0542 Maintenance Minder
This message reminds you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
MAIN ITEM (S)
SUB ITEM (S)
When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1
percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ message with the same
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ was displayed with. When
you see this message, have the
indicated maintenance performed as
soon as possible.
CONTINUED
537
Maintenance
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life information. Along
with the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, you
will see the percentage of the
remaining engine oil life and the
maintenance item codes on the
multi-information display.
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM CODE SUB ITEM CODE (S)
08/07/29 19:08:16 31TK4600 0543 Maintenance Minder
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
1 to 5 percent (see page 536 ).
538
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the remaining engine
oil life reaches 0%, the multiinformation display will show the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
and the maintenance item code(s).
This message is displayed when the
total mileage is less than 10 miles
(for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0%.
08/07/29 19:08:25 31TK4600 0544 Maintenance Minder
These messages will come on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
U.S.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
MAINTENANCE CODES
CANADA
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
0 to 1 percent.
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multiinformation display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total mileage after the remaining
oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).
CONTINUED
539
Maintenance
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 414 .
08/07/29 19:08:33 31TK4600 0545 Maintenance Minder
This message is displayed when you
drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)
or 10 km (for Canadian models)
after seeing the 0% message.
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
U.S.
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 541 .
Pressing either INFO button (▲/▼)
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
CANADA
When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life,
the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with
the maintenance item code(s) and
the total negative mileage after the
oil life became 0%, will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
540
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
All maintenance items shown on the
multi-information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 544 .
08/07/29 19:08:42 31TK4600 0546 Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
2. If the engine oil life is not
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel
repeatedly.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.
4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
CONTINUED
541
Maintenance
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
08/07/29 19:08:48 31TK4600 0547 Maintenance Minder
Your authorized dealer knows your
vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all receipts
as proof of completion, and have the
person who does the work fill out
your Maintenance Journal or
Canadian Maintenance Log. Check
your warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Acura parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
542
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the multiinformation display.
08/07/29 19:08:56 31TK4600 0548 Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 556 .
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 490 .
Maintenance
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 491 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
553 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 555 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
568 .
CONTINUED
543
08/07/29 19:09:05 31TK4600 0549 Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*
Replace engine oil* and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and line (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Symbol
1
2
3
4
* : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column
on page 542 .
NOTE:
Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during service 3 if they are noisy.
5
6
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace transmission and transfer* fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under
−20°F, −29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/
100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid*
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds results in higher level of mechanical (shear)
stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
maintenance minder. If you regularly drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the differential
fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
* : SH-AWD only
544
08/07/29 19:09:08 31TK4600 0550 Fluid Locations
WASHER FLUID
(Black cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOR
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP
545
08/09/11 20:53:05 31TK4600 0551 Engine Compartment Covers
The component parts in the engine
compartment are protected by
several covers. You may need to
remove the covers when you
perform some simple maintenance
work.
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
COVER
All of the covers can be removed
simply by pulling them straight up.
1. Remove the right and left engine
compartment covers by sliding
them apart.
BULKHEAD COVER
2. Pull the bulkhead cover straight
up to remove. When removing the
cover, make sure to move the
bulkhead cover slightly to the left
so that the hood latch handle does
not get in the way.
3. After replacing the right engine
compartment cover, make sure
the washer fluid cap is firmly in
place.
546
When reinstalling the covers, make
sure the pins and tabs are in their
proper positions.
08/07/29 19:09:23 31TK4600 0552 Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Acura Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Acura Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Maintenance
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Install the engine oil
fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait
a few minutes, and recheck the oil
level (see page 490 ). Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
CONTINUED
547
08/07/29 19:09:31 31TK4600 0553 Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the multiinformation display.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Ambient Temperature
548
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multiinformation display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.
08/07/29 19:09:42 31TK4600 0554 Changing the Oil and Filter
DRAIN BOLT
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
WASHER
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
OIL FILTER
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
6. Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Maintenance
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
CONTINUED
549
08/07/29 19:09:51 31TK4600 0555 Changing the Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine and check your work.
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
550
MAX
MIN
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
To access the radiator reserve tank,
remove the right-side engine
compartment cover.
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
08/07/29 19:10:01 31TK4600 0556 Engine Coolant
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
5. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
RADIATOR CAP
1. Remove all engine compartment
covers (see page 546 ).
2. When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
551
Maintenance
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
08/07/29 19:10:07 31TK4600 0557 Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
On U.S. models
To check washer fluid level, cover
the reservoir cap center hole with
your finger while lifting the cap and
the attached measuring tube. The
washer fluid level in the tube will
indicate the washer fluid level in the
reservoir.
On Canadian models
If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘LOW
WASHER FLUID’’ message appears
on the multi-information display.
552
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
08/07/29 19:10:16 31TK4600 0558 Automatic Transmission Fluid
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on a maintenance
message in the multi-information
display.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
DIPSTICK
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
CONTINUED
553
Maintenance
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
08/07/29 19:10:24 31TK4600 0559 Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the filler hole
to bring it to the level between the
upper and lower marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Acura ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
The transmission should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is shown on a
maintenance message in the multiinformation display.
If you are not sure how to check
and add fluid, contact your dealer.
554
Use only Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid). Do not mix with
other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Acura ATF-Z1 may cause deterioration
in transmission operation and
durability, and could result in damage
to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Acura
ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Acura
new vehicle warranty.
08/07/29 19:10:33 31TK4600 0560 Brake Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoir monthly after removing the
left engine compartment cover (see
page 546 ).
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ message on the multiinformation display.
Replace the brake fluid when this
service is indicated on a maintenance
message in the multi-information
display.
Brake System
MAX
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
You need remove the left engine
compartment cover to check the
fluid level (see page 546 ).
555
Maintenance
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
08/07/29 19:10:41 31TK4600 0561 Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.
Low Beam Headlight Bulb
Replacement
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
replaced.
556
Replacing a High Beam
Headlight/Daytime Running
Light Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen high beam
headlight bulbs which are also used
for the daytime running light.
Handle it by its base and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove all engine compartment
covers (see page 546 ).
HOLDING CLIP
If you are replacing the bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the three
holding clips with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct by
pulling it straight up.
08/07/29 19:10:52 31TK4600 0562 Lights
RESERVE TANK
6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
BULB
7. Turn on the lights to test the new
bulb.
8. (Driver’s side)
Install the upper part of the air
intake duct.
STAY
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
9. (Passenger’s side)
Install the engine coolant reserve
tank.
10.Install the all engine compartment
covers.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
557
Maintenance
To change a bulb on the
passenger’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its stay.
CONNECTOR
08/07/29 19:10:59 31TK4600 0563 Lights
Replacing the Front Side Marker
Light Bulb
1. Start the engine. If you are
replacing a driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing a
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Turn off
the engine.
BOLTS
HOLDING CLIP
HOLDING
CLIP
SPOILER
2. Remove the two undercover bolts
and the holding clip with a flattipped screwdriver.
558
3. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the holding clips from the
edge of the inner fender cover,
and pull the inner fender cover
back.
08/07/29 19:11:07 31TK4600 0564 Lights
BULB
SOCKET
6. Install the new bulb in the socket
by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.
7. Insert the socket into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
1. Start the engine. If you are
replacing a driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing a
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Turn off
the engine.
9. Set the spoiler and inner fender
cover in the original position.
Install the bolts and holding clips,
and lock them in place by pushing
on their center.
Maintenance
4. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Parking Light Bulb
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its socket.
CONTINUED
559
08/07/29 19:11:15 31TK4600 0565 Lights
COVER
BOLTS
HOLDING CLIP
BULB SOCKET
HOLDING
CLIP
SPOILER
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the three holding clips
from the inner fender.
3. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove
the two mounting bolts and
remove the holding clip with a flattipped screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.
560
4. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pushing it in and turning it
counterclockwise until it unlocks.
08/07/29 19:11:25 31TK4600 0566 Lights
6. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Insert the socket into the light
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
8. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
COVER
HOLDING CLIP
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the three holding clips
from the inner fender.
1. Start the engine. If you are
replacing a driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing a
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Turn off
the engine.
CONTINUED
561
Maintenance
9. Push the under cover in place and
set the spoiler and inner fender
cover in the original position.
Install the bolts and holding clips,
and lock them in place by pushing
on their center.
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
08/07/29 19:11:34 31TK4600 0567 Lights
BOLTS
BULB
6. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
HOLDING
CLIP
8. Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
SPOILER
3. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove
the two mounting bolts and
remove the holding clip with a flattipped screwdriver.
Pull down the under cover from
the bumper carefully.
562
CONNECTOR
4. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
5. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
9. Push the under cover in place and
set the spoiler and inner fender
cover in the original position.
Install the bolts and holding clips,
and lock them in place by pushing
on their center.
08/07/29 19:11:42 31TK4600 0568 Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
SCREW
BOLTS
2. Remove the three stud bolts with a
socket or wrench.
3. Pull the taillight assembly straight
back out of the body.
CONTINUED
563
Maintenance
1. Open the trunk.
Remove the screw in the center of
the holding clip on the side of the
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
08/07/29 19:11:51 31TK4600 0569 Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
6. Push a new bulb straight into the
socket until it bottoms, and
reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Cleaning the Seat Belts
OPENING
7. Test the new bulb to make sure it
works.
8. Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
BULB SOCKET
4. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: back-up light,
turn signal, or side marker.
5. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise,
and pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
564
9. Put the holding clip into the hole
on the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screw.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
08/07/29 19:11:58 31TK4600 0570 Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Dirt build-up around the openings of
the seat belt anchors can cause the
belts to retract slowly. Wipe the
openings with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Floor Mats
DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT
FLOOR MAT ANCHORS
REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT
FLOOR MAT ANCHOR
Unlock
Unlock
Lock
Lock
If you use non-Acura floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Make sure the rear floor mats are
properly positioned. If not, the floor
mat will prevent the seat operation
and make the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
565
Maintenance
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. To lock each anchor, turn
the knob clockwise. This keeps the
floor mats from sliding forward
(possibly interfering with the pedals),
or backwards (making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective).
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
08/07/29 19:12:06 31TK4600 0571 Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the multiinformation display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the climate control system becomes
less than usual.
566
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
08/07/29 19:12:13 31TK4600 0572 Wiper Blades
BLADE
BLADE
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Maintenance
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
REINFORCEMENT
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
567
08/07/29 19:12:21 31TK4600 0573 Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
568
Tire Types
All models except SH-AWD model with
high performance tires and SH-AWD
TECH HPT models
Your vehicle is equipped with high
performance all-season tires
(marked All Season or M + S on the
sidewalls). These tires provide
excellent handling and braking
performance in most driving
situations.
SH-AWD model with high performance
tires and SH-AWD TECH HPT models
Your vehicle is equipped with high
performance summer tires. These
tires have a high-traction compound
and tread pattern to provide superior
acceleration, cornering, and stopping
under most driving conditions.
However, these tires are not suitable
for driving on snow or ice, so allseason or winter tires must be
installed for winter driving
conditions.
See page 575 for Winter Driving.
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
08/07/29 19:12:28 31TK4600 0574 Tires
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 526 for
more information on the TPMS.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
If you check air pressure when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Maintenance
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on the next page.
569
08/07/29 19:12:43 31TK4600 0575 Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
TL and TECH models
Tire Size
P245/50R17 98V
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
Rear:
2.2 kgf/cm )
U.S. SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH
models
Tire Size
P245/45R18 96V
U.S. SH-AWD model with high
performance tires and SH-AWD
TECH HPT models
Tire Size
245/40ZR19 94Y
570
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 37 psi (255 kPa ,
2.55 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
Rear:
2.2 kgf/cm )
Canadian SH-AWD and SH-AWD
TECH models
Tire Size
P245/45R18 96V
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
Rear:
2.2 kgf/cm )
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional technical information,
see page 518 .
08/07/29 19:12:54 31TK4600 0576 Tires
High Speed Driving
We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressures as shown below. If you do
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.
SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH models
P245/45R18 96V
Cold Tire Pressure for
High Speed Driving
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
Rear:
2.2 kgf/cm )
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
571
Maintenance
Tire Size
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
08/07/29 19:12:59 31TK4600 0577 Tires
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
572
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 619 ).
08/07/29 19:13:07 31TK4600 0578 Tires
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the multi-information display. Move
the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are
rotated. If you purchase directional
tires, rotate only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
573
Maintenance
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.
08/07/29 19:13:14 31TK4600 0579 Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
574
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
08/07/29 19:13:28 31TK4600 0580 Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
On 2WD Models
See page 617 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
619 for tire size information.
17 x 8.0 J (TPMS)
On U.S. SH-AWD Models
18 x 8.0 J (TPMS)
19 x 8.0 J (TPMS)*
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
On Canadian SH-AWD Models
18 x 8.0 J (TPMS)
Tires:
On U.S. SH-AWD Models
P245/45R18 96V
245/40ZR19 94Y*
On Canadian SH-AWD Models
P245/45R18 96V
Summer Tires
If your vehicle is equipped with
summer tires, be aware that these
tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more
information, consult your dealer.
Tire Chains
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires. Do not use chains on the
rear tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, we strongly recommend
using this Quality Chain Corp. tire
chain:
* : If equipped
575
Maintenance
On 2WD Models
P245/50R17 98V
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
08/07/29 19:13:36 31TK4600 0581 Tires
Premium Cobra Cable Chain
#1042P with accessory
adjusters*
This tire chain is available at many
auto supply stores. To find a local
store that carries the chain, call
Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.
To order the tire chain online, go to
www.qualitychaincorp.com, and enter
your vehicle information. When you
install the chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with the chains installed.
* : Rubber chain adjusters, or
tensioners, must be used to
prevent the chains from
contacting the body or the
chassis.
576
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Remove the chains as soon as you
begin driving on cleared roads.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
08/07/29 19:13:44 31TK4600 0582 Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your Acura dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
577
Maintenance
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder) after
removing all engine compartment
covers (see page 546 ). To remove it,
cover the terminals with a solution of
baking soda and water. It will bubble
up and turn brown. When this stops,
wash it off with plain water. Dry off
the battery with a cloth or paper
towel. Coat the terminals with grease
to help prevent further corrosion.
08/07/29 19:13:54 31TK4600 0583 Vehicle Storage
On models without navigation system
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting may be lost. To reset the time,
see page 377 .
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio, you will
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
376 ).
On models with navigation system
The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
578
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
08/07/29 19:13:58 31TK4600 0584 Vehicle Storage
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Maintenance
579
08/07/29 19:14:00 31TK4600 0585 580
08/07/29 19:14:03 31TK4600 0586 Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 582
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 583
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 588
Jump Starting ................................. 591
If the Engine Overheats ............... 593
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 595
Charging System Indicator........... 595
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 596
Brake System Indicator ................ 597
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 598
Fuses ............................................... 599
Fuse Locations ............................... 603
Emergency Towing ....................... 606
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 608
Taking Care of the Unexpected
581
08/07/29 19:14:12 31TK4600 0587 Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
582
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.
After several miles (kilometers)
driving with the spare, this
indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 529 ).
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
08/09/04 20:11:20 31TK4600 0588 Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
JACK
WHEEL NUT
WRENCH
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0).
See page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
EXTENSION
3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor by lifting up on the back edge.
4. Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
CONTINUED
583
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
08/07/29 19:14:28 31TK4600 0589 Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
584
JACKING POINT
7. Locate the jacking point nearest
the tire you need to change. It is
pointed to by an arrow molded into
the underside of the body. Place
the jack under the jacking point.
Turn the end bracket clockwise
until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point. Make sure the
jacking point tab is resting in the
jack notch.
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
8. Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
08/07/29 19:14:35 31TK4600 0590 Changing a Flat Tire
BRAKE HUB
10.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
11.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
CONTINUED
585
Taking Care of the Unexpected
9. Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
08/09/04 20:11:31 31TK4600 0591 Changing a Flat Tire
WING BOLT
For normal
tire
For compact
spare tire
SPACER CONE
12.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
14.Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
586
15.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
16.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
08/07/29 19:14:51 31TK4600 0592 Changing a Flat Tire
SPACER CONE
18.Store the jack and tools in the tool
kit case. Place the tool kit case in
the flat tire.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
TAB
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
19.Store the center cap in the trunk.
Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
Unhook the handle from the trunk
opening and lower the trunk floor
lid, then close the trunk lid.
20.Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 530 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
To remove the spacer cone,
squeeze the tabs on the wing bolt
to disengage it from the center of
the spacer cone, then pull the bolt
downward.
To install the wing bolt to the
spacer cone, reverse this
procedure.
17.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
587
08/07/29 19:14:59 31TK4600 0593 If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position or on models with keyless
access system, press the engine
start/stop button to set START
Mode (see page 180 ):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
588
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position or on
models with keyless access system,
press the engine start/stop button to
set START Mode (see page 180 ),
you do not hear the normal noise of
the engine trying to start. You may
hear a clicking sound, a series of
clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The shift lever must be in Park or
neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or on models with
keyless access system, press the
engine start/stop button to set ON
Mode (see page 180 ). Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 591 .
08/09/04 20:11:38 31TK4600 0594 If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position or on models
with keyless access system, press
the engine start/stop button to set
START Mode (see page 180 ). If
the headlights do not dim, check
the condition of the fuses. If the
fuses are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 606 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 577 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
591 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position or on models with keyless
access system, press the engine
start/stop button to set START
Mode (see page 180 ), but the engine
does not run.
CONTINUED
589
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 65 ).
08/09/04 20:11:45 31TK4600 0595 If the Engine Won’t Start
On models with keyless access system
Do you have your keyless access
system remote with you? The
vehicle will not start without the
remote within operating range.
The vehicle will not start without
the remote within operating range
and with the keyless access main
switch in the glove box turned on.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 505 .
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the warning indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 600 ).
590
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 606 .
NOTE: If you are unable to stop the
engine normally while in the Park
position, see Emergency Engine
Stop on page 184 .
08/07/29 19:15:19 31TK4600 0596 Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical
accessories: climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
TERMINAL COVER
3. Pull up the battery terminal cover
to remove. The battery terminal
cover can be removed without
removing front bulkhead cover.
CONTINUED
591
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You cannot start a vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or like ice, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
08/07/29 19:15:29 31TK4600 0597 Jump Starting
7. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
8. Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
9. Install the battery terminal cover.
The numbers in the illustration
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
4. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.
592
5. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding point
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
6. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
08/07/29 19:15:37 31TK4600 0598 If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 606 ).
CONTINUED
593
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
08/07/29 19:15:45 31TK4600 0599 If the Engine Overheats
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark
(see Adding Engine Coolant on
page 550 ).
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
594
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘
’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 606 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
08/07/29 19:15:56 31TK4600 0600 Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 490 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 547 ).
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
606 ).
Charging System
Indicator
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 88 ).
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
595
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
08/07/29 19:16:04 31TK4600 0601 Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message on
the multi-information display.
Tighten the cap until it clicks at least
once (see page 488 ). Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
596
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the malfunction
indicator lamp may also come on
with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 88 ).
Readiness Code
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes may be erased. It takes
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
08/07/29 19:16:12 31TK4600 0602 Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position (set ON mode on models
with keyless access system), without
starting the engine. The malfunction
indicator lamp will come on for 20
seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks
five times, the readiness codes are
not set. If possible, do not take your
vehicle for an emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. Refer to
Emissions Testing for more
information (see page 626 ).
U.S.
Canada
Brake System
Indicator
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 555 ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display when this
indicator comes on.
CONTINUED
597
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of
ON (II). See page 180 for ignition
switch and power mode comparison.
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ message on the multiinformation display.
08/09/04 20:11:54 31TK4600 0603 Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired by
your dealer as soon as possible (see
Emergency Towing on page 606 ).
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
598
MAINTENANCE LID
If the fuel fill door release button
does not work, use the release lever
inside the left maintenance lid in the
trunk.
RELEASE LEVER
To open the fuel fill door, pull the
release lever rearward.
08/09/04 20:12:04 31TK4600 0604 Fuses
DRIVER’S SIDE
PASSENGER’S SIDE
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
FUSE LABEL
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
three fuse boxes.
The passenger’s side interior fuse
box is on the lower passenger’s side
panel. To remove the fuse box lid,
put your finger in the notch on the
lid, and pull it upward slightly, then
pull it toward you and take it out of
its hinges.
AIR CLEANER HOUSING
The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side next to the air cleaner
housing.
To access the under-hood fuse box,
remove the left-side engine
compartment cover (see page 546 ).
599
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The interior fuse box is located
under the dashboard on the driver’s
side. The fuse label is attached
under the steering column.
NOTCH
08/07/29 19:16:33 31TK4600 0605 Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
603 , 604 and 605 , or the diagram on
the fuse box lid or the fuse label,
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine
start/stop button instead of an
ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of
LOCK (0). See page 180 for
ignition switch and power mode
comparison.
600
FUSE
BLOWN
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
BLOWN
Also check the combined fuse box in
the under-hood fuse box.
08/07/29 19:16:40 31TK4600 0606 Fuses
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
Your vehicle has spare fuses on the
back of the under-hood fuse box
cover.
CONTINUED
601
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided on the back of the
under-hood fuse box cover.
SPARE FUSES
08/07/29 19:16:45 31TK4600 0607 Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
602
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system may disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio, you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code
(see page 376 ).
08/07/29 19:16:54 31TK4600 0608 Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1−1 120 A
1−2 40 A
2−1 70 A
2−2 40 A
2−3 30 A
2−4 40 A
2−5
2−6
30 A
30 A
Circuits Protected
Battery
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
EPS
ABS/VSA MTR
ABS/VSA
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
Option
Headlight Washer
SH-AWD
No. Amps.
3−1
3−2
3−3
3−4
3−5
3−6
3−7
3−8
50 A
40 A
30 A
60 A
40 A*1
30 A*2
30 A
30 A
30 A
Circuits Protected
IG Main
Sub Fan Motor*1
Sub Fan Motor*2
Driver’s Side Fuse Box
Main Fan Motor
Driver’s Side Light Main
Wiper Motor
Passenger’s Side Light Main
40 A
−
−
−
40 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
−
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
Rear Defroster
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Heater Motor
Hazard
Horn and Stop
Keyless Access System
Not Used
IG Coil
FI Sub
Back Up
Interior Lights
FI Main
DBW
Back Up FI ECU
MG, Clutch
Radiator Fan Timer
*1 : On SH-AWD models only
*2 : On 2WD models only
CONTINUED
603
Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Circuits Protected
08/07/29 19:17:02 31TK4600 0609 Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
604
−
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Not Used
SH-AWD
Washer
Wiper
ODS
ABS/VSA
Not Used
Starter Relay
No. Amps.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
20 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
28
29
30
31
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
−
Circuits Protected
Fuel Pump
VB SOL
SRS
Meter
ACG
Not Used
Daytime Running Light
A/C
Accessory, Key, Lock*
Accessory
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Moonroof
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Rear Left Power Window
Front ACC Socket
Driver’s Power Window
Driver’s Side Door Lock
Front Left Fog Light
Left Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Left Headlight High Beam
TPMS
Left Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
*:
If equipped
08/07/29 19:17:08 31TK4600 0610 Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s side
1
2
10 A
10 A
3
4
5
6
10 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
Right Front Fog Light
Right Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
Interior Lights
7
8
−
20 A
9
20 A
10
11
10 A
20 A
12
13
10 A
20 A
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
−
20 A
15 A
−
7.5 A
20 A
−
−
−
*:
Circuits Protected
Not Used
Passenger’s Power Seat
Reclining
Passenger’s Power Seat
Sliding
Right Side Door Lock
Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window
Keyless Access System
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Not Used
Premium amplifier*
Console ACC Socket
Not Used
Lumbar Support
Seat Heater
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.
No. Amps.
If equipped
605
08/07/29 19:17:19 31TK4600 0611 Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
(On SH-AWD models)
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.
606
(Except SH-AWD models)
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground. This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D position for 5 seconds,
then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Models equipped with the keyless
access system have an engine start/
stop button instead of an ignition
switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the
equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). See
page 180 for ignition switch and
power mode comparison.
08/07/29 19:17:27 31TK4600 0612 Emergency Towing
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the f ront wheels of f
the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
On models with the Keyless Access
system, the ENGINE START/STOP
BUTTON indicator will conf irm that
the power mode is in the ACCESSORY
mode and that the steering lock is
released.
If the steering wheel does not turn
freely, rotate the wheel right and left
while pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP BUTTON. This
information also appears on the
multi-information display (see page
90 ).
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
CONTINUED
607
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
If you decide to tow your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground,
make sure you use a properlydesigned and attached tow bar.
Prepare the vehicle for towing as
described above, and leave the
ignition switched in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock. Make
sure the radio and any items plugged
into the accessory power socket are
turned off so they do not run down
the battery.
08/07/29 19:17:37 31TK4600 0613 Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
When you need to release the
steering lock while your vehicle’s
battery is dead, do this:
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page 606 ).
1. Follow the proper jump starting
procedures, Step 1 through Step 5,
to apply the power to your vehicle
(see pages 591 and 592 ).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
On models with keyless access system
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button and verify the steering lock
is released (see page 90 ).
To use the towing hook:
3. Follow the jump starting
procedures, Step 8 and Step 9, and
the instructions to disconnect the
jumper cable (see page 592 ). The
steering will remain unlocked even
if the battery is dead.
Failure to comply means the steering
lock may be damaged.
608
1. Remove the cover from the front
bumper using your fingers, or pry
it off with a flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the spare tire.
08/07/29 19:17:42 31TK4600 0614 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
609
08/07/29 19:17:45 31TK4600 0615 610
08/07/29 19:17:48 31TK4600 0616 Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 612
Specifications ................................. 614
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 617
Tire Labeling .................................. 619
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 621
Emissions Controls........................ 623
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 625
Emissions Testing ......................... 626
Technical Information
611
08/07/29 19:17:53 31TK4600 0617 Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
612
08/09/04 20:12:08 31TK4600 0618 Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Technical Information
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
613
08/09/08 17:53:05 31TK4600 0619 Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
U.S. Vehicle
Canada Vehicle
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
195.5 in (4,966 mm)
196.4 in (4,989 mm)
74.0 in (1,880 mm)
57.2 in (1,452 mm)
109.3 in (2,775 mm)
63.2 in (1,605.5 mm)
63.8 in (1,620 mm)
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
5
2
3
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6−19.4 oz (500−550 g)
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Fuel tank
Approx.
18.5 US gal (70 )
Engine coolant
Change*1
Total
Engine oil
Change*2
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission
2WD
fluid
SH-AWD
Total
2WD
SH-AWD
Rear
Change
differential
Total
fluid (SH-AWD)
Transfer
Change
assembly
Total
fluid (SH-AWD)
Windshield
U.S. Vehicle
washer
Canada Vehicle
reservoir
1.66 US gal (6.3 )
2.19 US gal (8.3 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
3.5 US qt (3.3 )
3.0 US qt (2.8 )
7.9 US qt (7.5 )
8.1 US qt (7.7 )
2.67 US qt (2.53 )
2.93 US qt (2.77 )
0.45 US qt (0.43 )
0.48 US qt (0.45 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
6.1 US qt (5.8 )
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.182 US gal (0.69 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
614
08/09/08 19:19:12 31TK4600 0620 Specifications
Lights
Headlight (Low beam*)
Headlight (High beam/DRL)
Front turn signal/parking
lights
Front side marker lights
Front fog lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
Rear side marker lights
License plate light
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
12 V − 35 W (D2S)
12 V − 60 W (HB3)
12 V − 24/2.2 CP (Amber)
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
3 CP
55 W (H11)
21 W (Amber)
16 W
3 CP
3 CP
5W
3.4 W
1.1 W
* : On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beam headlights,
replacement of a bulb should be performed by your dealer.
Battery
Capacity
Under-hood
See pages 604 and 605 or the fuse
label attached to the inside of the
fuse box door on each side of the
dashboard.
See page 603 or the fuse box
cover.
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Engine (SH-AWD)
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
211.7 cu-in (3,471 cm )
11.2 : 1
ILZKR7B11
NGK:
DENSO: SXU22HCR11
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC IN/EX VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)
223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )
11.2 : 1
NGK:
ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO: SXU22HCR11S
Technical Information
Fuses
Interior
12 V − 60 AH/5 HR
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
Engine (2WD)
Type
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
−0.5°
−1°
3.8°
CONTINUED
615
08/07/29 19:18:48 31TK4600 0621 Specifications
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Pressure
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :
*5 :
*6 :
616
P245/50R17 98V *1, *2
P245/45R18 96V *3, *4
245/40ZR19 94Y *5, *6
T135/80D17 103M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )*1, *2, *3, *4
37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm )*5, *6
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
TL
TECH
SH-AWD
SH-AWD TECH
SH-AWD TECH HPT
SH-AWD with high performance tires
08/07/29 19:18:56 31TK4600 0622 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Technical Information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
617
08/07/29 19:19:00 31TK4600 0623 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
618
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
08/07/29 19:19:12 31TK4600 0624 Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
(1)
98 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
V
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
P245/50R17 98V
P
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
245 − Tire width in millimeters.
50 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
(4)
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
(1)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
17 − Rim diameter in inches.
CONTINUED
619
Technical Information
R
08/07/29 19:19:22 31TK4600 0625 Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
Max Press − The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
DOT 4MIC 001X 5207
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
4MIC − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
001X − Tire type code.
5207 − Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
620
Maximum Tire Load
Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
08/07/29 19:19:30 31TK4600 0626 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
621
Technical Information
CONTINUED
08/07/29 19:19:34 31TK4600 0627 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
622
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
08/07/29 19:19:42 31TK4600 0628 Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
*
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply
with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS) for
Emissions valid at the time they are
manufactured.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
623
Technical Information
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
08/07/29 19:19:52 31TK4600 0629 Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
624
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work
together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Acura replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
08/07/29 19:19:59 31TK4600 0630 Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains platinum, palladium, and
rhodium. These metals serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
625
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
08/07/29 19:20:07 31TK4600 0631 Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
626
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
08/07/29 19:20:12 31TK4600 0632 Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Technical Information
627
08/07/29 19:20:14 31TK4600 0633 628
08/07/29 19:20:17 31TK4600 0634 Warranty and Client Relations
Client Service Information ........... 630
Warranty Coverages ..................... 631
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 632
Authorized Manuals ...................... 633
Warranty and Client Relations
629
08/07/29 19:20:25 31TK4600 0635 Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Acura Client
Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
630
Canadian Owners:
Acura Client Services
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax: Toll-free (877) 939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle identification number (see
page 612 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
08/07/29 19:20:35 31TK4600 0636 Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new Acura is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Acura accessories are covered under
this warranty. Time and mileage
limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Acura
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2009 Acura warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2009 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
631
Warranty and Client Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
08/07/29 19:20:40 31TK4600 0637 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
632
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
08/07/29 19:20:49 31TK4600 0638 Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Form Description
2009 Acura TL Service Manual
2009 Acura TL Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2009 Model Series Acura TL Body Repair Manual
2009 Acura TL Owner’s Manual
2009 Acura TL Navigation Manual
2009 Acura TL Maintenance Journal
2009 Acura TL Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
633
Authorized Manuals
Publication
Form Number
61TK400
61TK400EL
61TK430
31TK4600
31TK4800
31TK4M00
31TK4Q00
ACU-R
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
08/07/29 19:20:51 31TK4600 0639 634
08/09/04 20:19:20 31TK4600 0640 Index
A
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 65, 595
Jump Starting ............................. 591
Maintenance ............................... 577
Specifications ............................. 615
Before Driving ............................... 485
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 20
Beverage Holder ............................ 203
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ........ 392
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 521
Break-in, New Linings .............. 486
Fluid ............................................ 555
Parking ........................................ 201
System Indicator .................. 65, 597
Wear Indicators ......................... 520
Braking System.............................. 520
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 486
Brightness Control,
Instruments ................................ 137
Built-In Key..................................... 142
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 563
Daytime Running Lights .......... 556
Fog Lights .................................. 561
Specifications ............................. 345
Turn Signal Lights ............. 559, 563
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 556
C
Capacities Chart............................. 614
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 57
CONTINUED
I
INDEX
AAC ................................. 265, 307, 357
Accessories and Modifications .... 495
Accessories................................. 495
Modifications ............................. 496
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ...................................... 145
ACCESSORY Mode
(Power Mode) ............................ 178
Accessory Power Sockets............. 204
AcuraLink ....................................... 467
Adding Engine Coolant ................. 550
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 547
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 548
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 24
Additional Information ................ 24
Servicing ....................................... 35
System Components.................... 24
Air Conditioning System ............... 214
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 568
Antifreeze ....................................... 550
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 66, 521
Operation .................................... 521
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 376
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................. 145
Audio System ................................. 223
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .. 135
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 22
Automatic Speed Control.............. 386
Automatic Transmission............... 507
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 614
Checking Fluid Level ................ 553
Shifting ........................................ 508
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 507
Shift Lock Release ..................... 510
08/09/04 20:19:26 31TK4600 0641 Index
Carrying, Cargo ............................. 497
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
Ceiling Light ................................... 209
Certification Label ......................... 612
Chains, tires.................................... 575
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 548
When to....................................... 535
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 583
Charging System Indicator .... 65, 595
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 502
Childproof Door Locks ................. 147
Child Safety ...................................... 37
Booster Seats ............................... 54
Child Seats .................................... 45
Infants ........................................... 42
Large Children ............................. 53
LATCH.......................................... 47
Risks with Airbags....................... 38
Small Children.............................. 43
Tethers.......................................... 51
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 38
Cleaning
Seat Belts .................................... 564
Client Service Information ........... 630
Climate Control System ................ 214
II
Clock ............................................... 377
CO in the Exhaust ................... 57, 624
Compact Spare tire ........................ 582
Compass.......................................... 382
Console Compartment .................. 205
Consumer Information*................ 630
Controls, Instruments and .............. 61
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 550
Checking ..................................... 491
Proper Solution .......................... 550
Temperature Gauge .................... 76
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 623
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 72
Cruise Control Operation ............. 386
Cup Holders.................................... 203
Customer Relations Office ........... 630
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 62
Daytime Running Lights............... 136
Daytime Running Light Indicator.. 72
Defects, Reporting Safety* .......... 632
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 139
Defrosting the Windows ............... 219
Dimensions ..................................... 614
Dimming the Headlights .............. 133
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 553
Engine Oil ................................... 490
Directional Signals......................... 133
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 520
Disc Changer.................................. 240
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 250
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 550
Doors
Door Lock Sensor Button ......... 170
Monitor Indicator .................. 11, 88
Power Door Locks ..................... 146
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ......... 617
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 501
Economy ..................................... 492
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 164
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 492
08/09/04 20:19:32 31TK4600 0642 Index
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 64, 595
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 547
Overheating................................ 593
Specifications ............................. 615
Speed Limiter ............................. 510
Starting........................................ 503
Engine, if it won’t start .................. 588
Engine Start/Stop Button ............. 177
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 487
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 623
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 57
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 18
F
Fan, Interior.................................... 218
Features, Comfort and
Convenience ............................... 213
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 487
Filter, Oil ......................................... 548
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 139
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 583
Floor Mats ...................................... 565
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 553
Brake ........................................... 555
Windshield Washers ................. 552
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 372
Fog Lights ...................................... 137
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 26
Front Seats ..................................... 155
Adjusting..................................... 155
Heaters........................................ 193
Airbags ...................................... 9, 26
Fuel .................................................. 486
Fill Door and Cap....................... 487
Gauge ............................................ 75
Octane Requirement ................. 486
Reserve Indicator......................... 73
Tank, Filling the......................... 487
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 599
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 492
INDEX
Electronic Stability Control
(ECS)........................................... 523
Emergencies on the Road............. 581
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 591
Brake System Indicator ............ 597
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 583
Charging System Indicator ...... 595
Checking the Fuses................... 599
Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 139
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ....... 608
Jump Starting ............................. 591
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 595
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 596
Overheated Engine ................... 593
Towing ........................................ 606
Emergency Brake .......................... 201
Emergency Flashers ..................... 139
Emergency Towing ....................... 606
Emergency Trunk Opener ........... 150
Emissions Controls........................ 623
Emissions Testing, State .............. 626
Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 76
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 64, 596
Oil Life .................................. 84, 535
CONTINUED
III
08/09/04 20:19:39 31TK4600 0643 Index
Gasoline .......................................... 486
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 73
Gauge ............................................ 75
Octane Requirement ................. 486
Tank, Filling the......................... 487
Gas Station Procedures................. 487
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 76
Fuel ................................................ 75
Speedometer ................................ 75
Tachometer .................................. 75
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 507
Glove Box ....................................... 205
H
Halogen Fog Bulbs ........................ 556
HandsFreeLink (HFL) ....... 392, 420
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 139
Headlights ...................................... 133
Aiming ......................................... 556
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature .................................... 135
Daytime Running Lights .......... 136
High Beam Indicator ................... 71
IV
Reminder Chime........................ 133
Turning on .................................. 133
Head Restraints ............................. 156
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 133
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 389
Hood, Opening the ........................ 489
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 612
Ignition
Keys............................................. 141
Switch .......................................... 145
Timing Control System ............. 624
Immobilizer System....................... 143
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators .......................................... 64
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake)....... 66, 521
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 65, 597
Charging System ................. 65, 595
Cruise Control .............................. 72
Fog Light ...................................... 71
High Beam.................................... 71
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 65
Low Fuel ....................................... 73
Low Oil Pressure ................. 64, 595
Side Airbag Off ...................... 33, 67
SRS .......................................... 26, 67
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 70
VSA Activation ............................. 68
VSA System .................................. 68
Infant Restraint ................................ 42
Infant Seats ....................................... 42
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 568
Inside Mirror .................................. 161
Inspection, Tire .............................. 571
Instrument Panel ............................. 63
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 64
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 137
Interior Lights ................................ 209
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 584
Jack, Tire ........................................ 583
Jump Starting ................................. 591
08/09/04 20:19:46 31TK4600 0644 Index
K
Keys ................................................. 141
Built-In......................................... 142
Keyless Access Remote ........ 168, 173
Keyless Access Remote System
Entry Main Switch ..................... 187
Keyless Access System................. 167
Keyless Memory Setting .............. 176
L
M
Maintenance ................................... 533
Minder......................................... 535
Owner Maintenance Checks.... 543
Safety........................................... 534
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ..................................... 64, 596
Memory, Driving Position ............ 164
Meters, Gauges.......................... 63, 75
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 161
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 496
Moonroof ........................................ 199
Multi-Information Display .............. 77
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 509
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 486
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 612
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 486
Odometer .......................................... 81
Odometer, Trip ................................ 81
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 548
Change, When to ....................... 544
Checking Engine ....................... 490
Pressure Indicator ............... 64, 595
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 547
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 145
ON Mode (Power Mode).............. 178
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 623
Operating Range ............................ 168
Outside Mirrors ............................. 161
Outside Temperature ...................... 84
Overheating, Engine ..................... 593
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 543
CONTINUED
V
INDEX
Label, Certification ........................ 612
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 133
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 16, 21
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 556
Indicator ........................................ 63
Parking ........................................ 133
Turn Signal ........................... 70, 133
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 145
Lockout Prevention ....................... 147
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 145
Glove Box ................................... 205
Power Door ................................ 146
Trunk .......................................... 148
Low Coolant Level ......................... 491
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 64, 595
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 614
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 497
08/09/04 20:19:52 31TK4600 0645 Index
P
Panel Brightness Control ............. 137
Park Gear Position......................... 508
Parking ............................................ 519
Parking Brake ................................ 201
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 65, 597
Parking Lights................................ 133
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 519
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 34
PGM-FI System.............................. 624
Power Mode ................................... 178
ACCESSORY Mode .................. 179
ON Mode .................................... 179
START Mode ............................. 180
VEHICLE OFF Mode ............... 179
Power Socket Locations................ 202
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Protecting Children ......................... 37
Installing a Child Seat Using
Latch ......................................... 47
VI
Installing a Child Seat with a
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................... 49
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether ....................................... 51
Selecting a Child Seat.................. 45
Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Protecting Larger Children ........ 53
Protecting Small Children .......... 43
Protecting Your Discs ........... 251, 313
Fuses ........................................... 599
Light Bulbs ................................. 556
Tires ............................................ 568
Wiper Blades .............................. 566
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 23
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 491
Restraint, Child ................................ 37
Reverse Gear Position................... 509
Rotation, Tire ................................. 573
R
S
Radiator Overheating .................... 593
Radio/Disc Sound System.... 225, 278
Readiness Codes .................... 596, 626
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 563
Rear Seat Armrest ......................... 160
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 483
Rear View Mirror........................... 161
Rear Window Defogger ................ 139
Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 155
Reminder Lights .............................. 64
Remote Audio Controls................. 374
Remote Transmitter ...................... 151
Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 548
Safety Belts................................... 8, 20
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 632
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Door Locks ................................... 11
Head Restraints ........................... 15
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Seats and Seat-Backs ............ 13, 14
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 59
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Satellite Radio ........................ 234, 293
08/09/04 20:19:59 31TK4600 0646 Index
Snow Tires ...................................... 575
Sound System ................................. 223
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 582
Specifications ..................... 582, 616
Specifications Charts..................... 614
Speed Control ................................. 386
SRS, Additional Information........... 24
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Airbag Components..................... 24
Airbag Service .............................. 35
How the SRS Indicator
Works ........................................ 32
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 26
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 32
SRS Indicator.............................. 32, 67
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 145
START Mode (Power Mode)....... 178
Start/Stop Button, Engine ............ 178
Starting the Engine ............... 503, 506
With a Dead Battery ................. 591
State Emissions Testing ............... 623
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 593
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................. 140
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 145
Stereo Sound System .................... 223
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 578
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 207
Super Handling All-Wheel Drive
(TM) (SH-AWD ) ....................... 73
Supplemental Restraint System ..... 24
Servicing ....................................... 35
SRS Indicator................................ 34
System Components.................... 24
T
Tachometer ...................................... 75
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 581
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 617
Emissions Control Systems ...... 623
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 625
Temperature Gauge ........................ 76
Temperature, Outside ..................... 84
CONTINUED
VII
INDEX
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 20
Additional Information ................ 20
Cleaning ...................................... 564
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Maintenance ................................. 23
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 20, 64
System Components.................... 20
Use During Pregnancy................ 18
Seat Heaters ................................... 193
Seats, Adjusting the ....................... 155
Security System ............................. 381
Sequential Shift Mode ................... 514
Serial Number ................................ 612
Service Intervals ............................ 544
Service Manual* ............................ 633
Service Station Procedures .......... 488
Setting the Clock ........................... 377
SH-AWD Indicator......................... 73
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 507
Shift Lock Release ......................... 510
Shifting ............................................ 508
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 30
Side Airbag Off Indicator ......... 33, 67
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 32
Signaling Turns .............................. 133
08/09/04 20:20:04 31TK4600 0647 Index
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 222
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 625
Tilt the Steering Wheel................. 140
Time, Setting the ........................... 377
Tire Chains ..................................... 575
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 583
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System..................................... 526
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator............................ 69, 526
TPMS System Failure ............... 529
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages .................................... 527
Tires ................................................ 568
Air Pressure ............................... 568
Checking Wear .......................... 571
Compact Spare ........................... 582
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 617
Inflation ....................................... 568
Inspection ................................... 571
Replacing .................................... 574
Rotating....................................... 573
Snow ............................................ 575
Specifications ............................. 616
Summer Tire .............................. 575
VIII
Traction Devices........................ 575
Winter Driving ........................... 575
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 583
Torque Distribution Monitor
(SH-AWD ) ................................ 517
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 531
Emergency Wrecker ................. 606
Traction Devices ............................ 575
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 553
Checking Fluid Level Manual .. 555
Fluid Selection ................... 554, 555
Identification Number............... 612
Shifting the Automatic .............. 508
Treadwear ...................................... 617
Trip Computer ................................. 82
Trip Meter ........................................ 81
Trunk............................................... 148
Emergency Trunk Release....... 150
Opening the ................................ 148
Open Monitor Light .............. 11, 88
Turn Signals ................................... 133
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 581
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 617
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 486
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 550
V
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 498
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 614
VEHICLE OFF Mode
(Power Mode) ............................ 178
Vehicle Identification Number..... 612
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ..... 523
VSA System Indicator ......... 68, 523
VSA Activation Indicator .... 68, 523
VSA Off Switch .......................... 524
Vehicle Storage .............................. 578
VIN .................................................. 612
Viscosity, Oil................................... 548
08/09/04 20:20:08 31TK4600 0648 Index
W
XM Satellite Radio ................. 233, 292
* : U.S.
INDEX
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 58
Warranty Coverages* ................... 631
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 552
Operation .................................... 131
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 140
Alignment and Balance ............. 573
Compact Spare ........................... 582
Windows
Operating the Power ................. 195
Rear, Defogger .......................... 139
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 131
Defroster .................................... 219
Washers ...................................... 552
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 566
Operation .................................... 131
Worn Tires ..................................... 571
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 606
X
IX
08/07/29 19:21:56 31TK4600 0649 Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
18.5 US gal (70 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Service SJ ‘‘Energy
Conserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-20
viscosity (see page 547 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) (see page
553 ).
On models with SH-AWD
Rear Differential Fluid:
Use Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) only.
Capacity:
SH-AWD differential case
2.67 US qt (2.53 )
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 555 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
All models except SH-AWD with
High Paformance Tires and
SH-AWD TECH HTP models
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
SH-AWD with High Paformance
Tires and SH-AWD TECH HTP
models
Front:
37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm )
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire Pressure:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising